Sony DVD Recorder RDR HXD1090 User Manual

3-295-080-11(1)  
DVD Recorder  
Operating Instructions  
To find out useful hints, tips and information about Sony products and  
services please visit: www.sony-europe.com/myproduct  
RDR-HXD790/HXD890/HXD990/HXD1090  
RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095  
© 2008 Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The manufacturer of this  
product is Sony Corporation,  
1-7-1 Konan Minato-ku  
Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan. The  
Authorized Representative  
for EMC and product safety  
is Sony Deutschland GmbH,  
Hedelfinger Strasse 61,  
70327 Stuttgart, Germany.  
For any service or guarantee  
matters please refer to the  
addresses given in separate  
service or guarantee  
Disposal of Old Electrical  
& Electronic Equipment  
(Applicable in the  
European Union and  
other European  
Disposal of waste  
batteries (applicable in  
the European Union and  
other European  
countries with separate  
collection systems)  
This symbol on the battery or on  
the packaging indicates that the  
battery provided with this product  
shall not be treated as household  
waste.  
By ensuring these batteries are  
disposed of correctly, you will  
help prevent potentially negative  
consequences for the environment  
and human health which could  
otherwise be caused by  
countries with separate  
collection systems)  
documents.  
This symbol on the product or on  
its packaging indicates that this  
product shall not be treated as  
household waste. Instead it shall  
be handed over to the applicable  
collection point for the recycling  
of electrical and electronic  
equipment. By ensuring this  
product is disposed of correctly,  
you will help prevent potential  
negative consequences for the  
environment and human health,  
which could otherwise be caused  
by inappropriate waste handling  
of this product. The recycling of  
materials will help to conserve  
natural resources. For more  
inappropriate waste handling of  
the battery. The recycling of the  
materials will help to conserve  
natural resources.  
detailed information about  
In case of products that for safety,  
performance or data integrity  
reasons require a permanent  
connection with an incorporated  
battery, this battery should be  
replaced by qualified service staff  
only.  
recycling of this product, please  
contact your local Civic Office,  
your household waste disposal  
service or the shop where you  
purchased the product.  
To ensure that the battery will be  
treated properly, hand over the  
product at end-of-life to the  
applicable collection point for the  
recycling of electrical and  
electronic equipment.  
For all other batteries, please view  
the section on how to remove the  
battery from the product safely.  
Hand the battery over to the  
applicable collection point for the  
recycling of waste batteries.  
For more detailed information  
about recycling of this product or  
battery, please contact your local  
Civic Office, your household  
waste disposal service or the shop  
where you purchased the product.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Do not move the recorder for  
one minute after you have  
unplugged the mains lead.  
• Do not attempt to replace or  
upgrade the hard disk by  
yourself, as this may result in  
malfunction.  
On placement  
• Place the recorder in a location  
with adequate ventilation to  
prevent heat build-up in the  
recorder.  
Precautions  
This equipment has been tested  
and found to comply with the  
limits set out in the EMC  
Directive using a connection  
cable shorter than 3 metres.  
• Do not place the recorder on a  
soft surface such as a rug that  
might block the ventilation  
holes.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
confined space such as a  
bookshelf or similar unit.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
location near heat sources, or  
in a place subject to direct  
sunlight, excessive dust, or  
mechanical shock.  
• Do not place the recorder in  
an inclined position. It is  
designed to be operated in a  
horizontal position only.  
• Keep the recorder and discs  
away from equipment with  
strong magnets, such as  
microwave ovens, or large  
loudspeakers.  
If the hard disk drive should  
malfunction, you cannot  
recover lost data. The hard disk  
drive is only a temporary  
storage space.  
On safety  
Should any solid object or  
liquid fall into the cabinet,  
unplug the recorder and have it  
checked by qualified personnel  
before operating it any further.  
About repairing the hard  
disk drive  
• The contents of the hard disk  
drive may be checked in case  
of repair or inspection during  
a malfunction or  
modification. However, the  
contents will not be backed up  
or saved by Sony.  
• If the hard disk needs to be  
formatted or replaced, it will  
be done at the discretion of  
Sony. All contents of the hard  
disk drive will be erased,  
including contents that violate  
copyright laws.  
About the hard disk drive  
The hard disk has a high storage  
density, which enables long  
recording durations and quick  
access to the written data.  
However, it can easily be  
damaged by shock, vibration or  
dust, and should be kept away  
from magnets. To avoid losing  
important data, observe the  
following precautions.  
• Do not apply a strong shock to  
the recorder.  
• Do not place the recorder in a  
location subject to mechanical  
vibrations or in an unstable  
location.  
• Do not place the recorder on  
top of a hot surface, such as a  
VCR or amplifier (receiver).  
• Do not use the recorder in a  
place subject to extreme  
changes in temperature  
(temperature gradient less  
than 10 °C/hour).  
• Do not place heavy objects on  
the recorder.  
On recording  
Make trial recordings before  
making the actual recording.  
On power sources  
• The recorder is not  
disconnected from the AC  
power source (mains) as long  
as it is connected to the wall  
outlet, even if the recorder  
itself has been turned off.  
• If you are not going to use the  
recorder for a long time, be  
sure to disconnect the  
recorder from the wall outlet.  
To disconnect the AC power  
cord (mains lead), grasp the  
plug itself; never pull the  
cord.  
On compensation for lost  
recordings  
Sony is not liable and will not  
compensate for any lost  
recordings or relevant losses,  
including when recordings are  
not made due to reasons  
including recorder failure, or  
when the contents of a  
recording are lost or damaged as  
a result of recorder failure or  
repair undertaken to the  
recorder. Sony will not restore,  
recover, or replicate the  
recorded contents under any  
circumstances.  
• Do not move the recorder  
with its mains lead connected.  
• Do not disconnect the mains  
lead while the power is on.  
• When disconnecting the  
mains lead, turn off the power  
and make sure that the hard  
disk drive is not operating (the  
clock is displayed in the front  
panel display for at least  
30 seconds and all recording  
or dubbing has stopped).  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copyrights  
• Television programmes,  
films, video tapes, discs, and  
other materials may be  
copyrighted. Unauthorized  
recording of such material  
may be contrary to the  
provisions of the copyright  
laws. Also, use of this  
recorder with cable television  
transmission may require  
authorization from the cable  
television transmitter and/or  
programme owner.  
• This product incorporates  
copyright protection  
technology that is protected  
by U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright  
protection technology mustbe  
authorized by Macrovision,  
and is intended for home and  
other limited viewing uses  
only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
• This Product includes  
About this manual  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
Check your model name  
Caution: This recorder is  
capable of holding a still  
video image or on-screen  
display image on your  
The instructions in this  
manual are for 8 models:  
RDR-HXD790, RDR-  
HXD795, RDR-HXD890,  
RDR-HXD895, RDR-  
HXD990, RDR-HXD995,  
RDR-HXD1090, and RDR-  
HXD1095. Check your  
model name by looking at  
the front panel of the  
recorder.  
television screen  
indefinitely. If you leave the  
still video image or on-  
screen display image  
displayed on your TV for an  
extended period of time you  
risk permanent damage to  
your television screen.  
Plasma display panels and  
projection televisions are  
especially susceptible to this.  
• In this manual, the internal  
hard disk drive is written as  
“HDD,” and “disc” is used as  
a general reference for the  
HDD, DVDs, or CDs unless  
otherwise specifiedbythe text  
or illustrations.  
If you have any questions or  
problems concerning your  
recorder, please consult your  
nearest Sony dealer.  
• Icons, such as  
, listed  
DVD  
at the top of each explanation  
indicate what kind of media  
can be used with the function  
being explained. For details,  
Discs” on page 151.  
®
FontAvenue fonts licenced  
• Instructions in this manual  
describe the controls on the  
remote. You can also use the  
controls on the recorder if  
they have the same or similar  
names as those on the remote.  
• The on-screen display  
by NEC corporation.  
FontAvenue is a registered  
trademark of NEC  
corporation.  
• “ ” and x-Application are  
trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
illustrations used in this  
manual may not match the  
graphics displayed on your  
TV screen.  
• RDR-HXD795/HXD895/  
HXD995/HXD1095 is used  
for illustration purposes.  
• The explanations regarding  
DVDs in this manual refer to  
DVDs created on this  
recorder. The explanations do  
not apply to DVDs that are  
created on other recorders and  
played back on this recorder.  
Copy guard function  
Since the recorder has a copy  
guard function, programmes  
received through an external  
tuner (not supplied) may  
contain copy protection signals  
(copy guard function) and as  
such may not be recordable,  
depending on the type of signal.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
About the “Control for HDMI” functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Sync  
Step 4: Inserting a Conditional Access Module (CAM)  
If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD  
®
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system (For analogue broadcasting/  
in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seven Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder  
Recording programmes using Series Recording  
(models for the UK only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
,continued  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+ (in areas with GUIDE Plus+  
service only)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Playing from the beginning of the programme you are recording  
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Playing a previous recording while making another  
(Simultaneous Rec and Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD y DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Dubbing from HDD Camcorder Using the On-Screen Display  
(HDD-Cam Dubbing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
,continued  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying tracks or albums (USB t HDD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Copying audio tracks (DISC t HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Copying tracks or albums on the HDD (HDD y HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
(USB t DVD-RW/DVD-R). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
(HDD y HDD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
(HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Copying JPEG image files to a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R) . . . . 111  
Creating a Slideshow with Your Favourite Music and Graphic Effects  
(x-Pict Story) (HDD only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on MP3 Audio Tracks, JPEG Image Files, DivX Video Files,  
and i.Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guide to Parts and Controls  
For more information, see the pages in parentheses.  
Remote  
The AUDIO button has a tactile dot*.  
H CLEAR (44, 77, 78)  
I ANGLE (75, 114)  
Changes the angles or rotates an image  
during slideshow.  
Switches between TV mode and DVD  
mode.  
Selects a subtitle language.  
L
(text) (51, 52)  
This button is not available in some  
areas.  
Displays the disc’s menu.  
N Green (50, 61)  
P Red (50, 61)  
R SYSTEM MENU (120)  
A HDD (38)  
Records to or plays titles on HDD.  
Displays EPG or GUIDE Plus+ system  
screen.  
®
Records to or plays titles on DVD.  
S TIMER (56, 59)  
B [/1 (on/standby) (30)  
T INFO (information) (50, 62)  
Turns the recorder on or off.  
Displays the programme information.  
C Z (open/close) (38)  
U </M/m/,/ENTER (30)  
Opens or closes the disc tray.  
Selects a desired item.  
D PROG (programme) +/– (38)  
V O RETURN (30)  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
Cancels scanning of programme  
positions.  
E Number buttons (80)  
The number 5 button has a tactile dot*.  
F INPUT (input select) (60, 72)  
Selects an input source.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
W DISPLAY (43)  
Displays the playing status or disc  
information.  
X ./> (previous/next) (75,  
105)  
Changes the programme list by page.  
/
(instant replay/instant  
mc CM (search/  
/
slow/freeze frame) (75, 105)  
DAY +/– (62)  
Changes the programme list by day.  
H (play) (73, 114)  
X (pause) (39, 75, 105, 114)  
x (stop) (73, 104, 114)  
The H button has a tactile dot*.  
HDD/DVD DUB (90)  
Starts dubbing the current playing title  
or cancels the dubbing.  
Selects the recording mode.  
wj ZOOM (114)  
Zooms an image during a slideshow.  
wk TV [/1 (on/standby) (28)  
TV t (input select) (28)  
TV 2 (volume) +/– (28)  
TV PROG (programme) +/– (28)  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
wl PLAY MODE (77, 80)  
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating  
the recorder.  
,continued  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front panel  
A [/1 (on/standby) (30)  
O CAM (Conditional Access  
Module) slot (RDR-HXD795/  
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095only)  
Turns the recorder on or off.  
B
(remote sensor) (27)  
C Disc tray (38)  
P ONE-TOUCH DUB (96, 100)  
Starts dubbing from a connected digital  
video camera.  
D Front panel display (15)  
E Z (open/close) (38)  
Opens or closes the disc tray.  
Q
DV IN jack (98)  
Connect a DV camcorder to this jack.  
F N (play) (73, 114)  
The N button has a tactile dot*.  
R
USB jack (type A) (102, 108)  
Connect a USB device to this jack.  
G x (stop) (73, 104, 114)  
S PictBridge USB jack (type B)  
I HDD (38)  
Connect a PictBridge-compatible  
printer to this jack.  
Records to or plays titles on HDD. The  
HDD indicator lights up when the HDD  
is selected.  
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating  
the recorder.  
Records to or plays titles on DVD. The  
DVD indicator lights up when the DVD  
is selected.  
To lock the recorder (Child Lock)  
You can lock all of the buttons on the  
recorder so that the settings are not cancelled  
by mistake.  
When the recorder is turned off, hold down  
x (stop) on the recorder until “LOCKED”  
appears in the front panel display. The  
recorder does not work except for timer  
recordings while the Child Lock is set.  
To unlock the recorder, hold down x (stop)  
on the recorder until “UNLOCKED”  
appears in the front panel display.  
K PROGRAM +/– (38)  
The + button has a tactile dot*.  
L INPUT (input select) (60, 72)  
Selects an input source.  
M LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/  
L(MONO) AUDIO R) jacks (35)  
Connect a VCR or similar recording  
device to these jacks.  
N Z (eject) (RDR-HXD795/  
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095only)  
Removes the CAM from the CAM slot.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Front panel display  
A Displays the following:  
• Playing time  
D Timer indicator (66)  
Lights up when the timer for recording  
is set.  
• Current title/chapter/track/index  
number  
• Recording time/recording mode  
• Clock  
• Programme position  
• EPG indication (61)  
“EPG” appears when receiving the  
GUIDE Plus+ data.  
E Disc type  
Lights up when a recordable DVD-R or  
DVD-RW disc is loaded.  
F Command Mode indicator (141)  
Displays the Command Mode of the  
remote.  
• TV Direct Rec. indication (38)  
“TV” appears in the right most two  
digits.  
When the Command Mode for the  
recorder is set to “3 (Default setting),”  
either “1” or “2” does not appear.  
• UPDATE indication  
“UPDATE” appears when the  
recorder is updating the EPG  
information.  
G Recording status  
H Dubbing direction indicator  
I Playing status  
B NTSC indicator (125, 131)  
Lights up when NTSC colour system is  
selected.  
C VPS/PDC indicator (57, 69)  
Lights up when the VPS/PDC function  
is turned on.  
,continued  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Rear panel  
A ANALOG AERIAL IN/OUT jacks  
F HDMI OUT (high-definition  
multimedia interface out) jack  
B LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L/VIDEO)  
jacks (22, 25)  
G DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack  
C LINE 1/DECODER jack (34)  
H AC IN terminal (27)  
D G-LINK jack (20)  
Connect the set top box controller to this  
jack.  
I LINE 3 – TV jack (22)  
J LINE 2 OUT (S VIDEO) jack (22)  
E DIGITAL AERIAL IN/OUT jacks  
K COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) jacks (22)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hookups and Settings  
Hooking Up the Recorder  
Follow steps 1 through 7 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder. Do not connect  
the mains lead until you reach “Step 5: Connecting the Mains Lead” on page 27.  
b Notes  
• See “Specifications” (page 162) for a list of supplied accessories.  
• Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.  
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.  
• You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack.  
• Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting.  
Checking hookup and setting methods  
The recorder incorporates both analogue and digital tuners. The programme guide and timer  
recording method differ depending on which one you select. Depending on the broadcasts you  
are receiving and your equipment, select one of the following aerial hookups. Do NOT set  
“LINE 1 In” to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 131) when making connection C.  
When you receive  
Hookup  
Programme guide  
Timer recording using  
programme guide  
Freeview  
Digital Service  
Both Freeview and  
analogue terrestrial  
broadcasting  
Select Digital Service or See page 53 when using  
GUIDE Plus+ (page 30). Digital Service.  
See page 66 when using  
GUIDE Plus+.  
Satellite, Cable  
Terrestrial  
b Note  
Analogue broadcasts are scheduled to end at different times, depending on the country/area.  
After analogue broadcasts end in your area, you will not be able to use hookup D to view TV broadcasts.  
At that time, change to hookup A to view digital broadcasts.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box  
Controller  
b Notes  
• If your aerial is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead cable), use an external aerial connector (not supplied) to  
connect the aerial to the recorder.  
• If you have separate cables for AERIAL antennas, use an AERIAL UHF/VHF band mixer (not supplied)  
to connect the aerial to the recorder.  
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected  
set top box receiver.  
A: Receiving Freeview (For digital broadcasting)  
Use this hookup if you can receive Freeview.  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme  
position on the recorder.  
Wall  
TV  
to aerial input  
Aerial cable (supplied)  
to DIGITAL AERIAL IN  
to DIGITAL AERIAL OUT  
DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
1 Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV, and connect it to DIGITAL AERIAL IN on  
the rear panel of the recorder.  
2 Connect DIGITAL AERIAL OUT of the recorder to the aerial input of your TV using the  
supplied aerial cable.  
z Hint  
For RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095 (except models for the UK) only  
When connecting to an indoor aerial, use one with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA. Then set “Aerial  
Power” to “On” in the “Digital Tuner” setup (page 127).  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
B: Receiving Freeview and analogue terrestrial broadcastings  
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analogue TV  
broadcasts. Use this hookup if you want to view both Freeview and analogue terrestrial  
broadcastings.  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme  
position on the recorder.  
TV  
Wall  
to aerial input  
Aerial cable (long, supplied)  
to DIGITAL  
AERIAL IN  
to ANALOG  
AERIAL IN  
to DIGITAL  
AERIAL OUT  
Aerial cable  
(short, supplied)*  
to ANALOG  
AERIAL OUT  
DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
* Aerial cable is supplied for some models.  
1 Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV, and connect it to the DIGITAL AERIAL IN  
jack on the rear panel of the recorder.  
2 Connect the DIGITAL AERIAL OUT jack and the ANALOG AERIAL IN jack using the  
supplied short aerial cable.  
3 Connect the ANALOG AERIAL OUT jack of the recorder to the aerial input of your TV  
using the supplied long aerial cable.  
,continued  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting)  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver.  
To watch cable programmes, you need to match the programme position on the recorder to  
the aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver.  
Place the set top box controller  
near the remote sensor on the  
set top box receiver.  
Wall  
Set top box  
controller  
Set top box  
receiver  
ANT IN  
SCART cord*2  
TO TV  
(not supplied)  
Aerial cable*1  
(not supplied)  
to ANALOG  
AERIAL IN  
to G-LINK  
DVD recorder  
to ANALOG  
AERIAL OUT  
TV  
Aerial cable  
(supplied)  
to aerial input  
: Signal flow  
*1  
If your set top box receiver does not have an aerial output jack, connect the aerial to the recorder’s  
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack.  
Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connector.  
*2  
If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals  
This recorder accepts RGB signals. If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals,  
connect the TV SCART connector on the set top box receiver to the LINE 1/DECODER jack,  
and set “LINE 1 In” to “RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 131). Refer to the  
instructions supplied with the set top box receiver.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About the set top box receiver control function (in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)  
You can use the set top box receiver control function with hookup C.  
When using the set top box receiver control function:  
– The recorder controls the set top box receiver via the supplied set top box controller.  
– The recorder controls programme positions on the set top box receiver for timer recording.  
– You can use the recorder’s remote control to change programme positions on the set top box  
receiver whenever the set top box receiver and recorder are turned on.  
After making hookup C, check that the recorder correctly controls the set top box receiver  
D: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting)  
Use this hookup if you watch cable programme positions without a set top box receiver. Also  
use this hookup if you are only connecting an aerial antenna.  
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme  
position on the recorder.  
Wall  
to ANALOG AERIAL IN  
DVD recorder  
to ANALOG AERIAL OUT  
TV  
to aerial input  
Aerial cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
1 Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV, and connect it to ANALOG AERIAL IN on  
the rear panel of the recorder.  
2 Connect ANALOG AERIAL OUT of the recorder to the aerial input of your TV using  
the supplied aerial cable.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord  
Select one of the following patterns, A through E, according to the input jack on your TV  
monitor, projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable  
you to view pictures.  
B
A
TV  
Audio/video  
cord (not  
supplied)  
TV, projector, or  
audio component  
to LINE 2 OUT  
(VIDEO)  
SCART cord (not supplied)  
(yellow)  
to T LINE 3 – TV  
DVD recorder  
to LINE 2 OUT  
(S VIDEO)  
to HDMI OUT  
(blue)  
(red)  
(green)  
to COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
HDMI cord  
(not supplied)  
Component video  
cord (not supplied)  
(blue)  
(red)  
(green)  
C
D
E
TV, projector, or audio  
component  
TV, projector, or audio  
component  
TV, projector, or  
audio component  
: Signal flow  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A SCART input jack  
When connecting to the HDMI jack  
Follow the steps below. Improper handling  
may damage the HDMI jack and the  
connector.  
When setting “LINE 3 Out” to “S-Video” or  
“RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup  
(page 131), use a SCART cord that  
conforms to the selected signal.  
1
Carefully align the HDMI jack on the  
rear of the recorder and the HDMI  
connector by checking their shapes.  
Make sure the connector is not upside  
down or tilted.  
B Video input jack  
You will enjoy standard quality images.  
C S VIDEO input jack  
You will enjoy high quality images.  
D Component video input jacks (Y, PB/  
CB, PR/CR)  
You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction  
and high quality images.  
If your TV accepts progressive 525p/625p  
format signals, use this connection and set  
“Progressive” to “Compatible” in the “Easy  
Setup” setup (page 30). Then set  
Connector is upside  
down  
Not straight  
2
Insert the HDMI connector straight into  
the HDMI jack.  
“Component Video Out” to “Progressive” in  
the “Video In/Out” setup to send progressive  
video signals. For details, see “Component  
Video Out” on page 130.  
Do not bend or apply pressure to the  
HDMI connector.  
E HDMI input jack  
Use a certified HDMI cord (not supplied) to  
enjoy high quality digital picture and sound  
through the HDMI OUT jack.  
When connecting a Sony TV that is  
compatible with the “Control for HDMI”  
function, see page 24.  
To see the signals from the connected set top  
box receiver when the set top box receiver is  
connected to the recorder using a SCART  
cord only, turn the recorder on.  
b Notes  
• Be sure to disconnect the HDMI cord when  
moving the recorder.  
• Do not apply too much pressure to the cabinet  
wall, if you place the recorder on the cabinet  
with the HDMI cord connected. It may damage  
the HDMI jack or the HDMI cord.  
• Do not twist the HDMI connector while  
connecting to or disconnecting from the HDMI  
jack to avoid damaging the HDMI jack and  
connector.  
When playing “wide screen” images  
Some recorded images may not fit your TV  
screen. To change the picture size, see  
page 137.  
If you are connecting to a VCR  
Connect your VCR to the LINE 1/  
DECODER jack on the recorder (page 34).  
,continued  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
b Notes  
b Notes  
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord  
between the recorder and your TV at the same  
time.  
• For correct SMARTLINK connection, you will  
need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins.  
Refer as well to your TV’s instruction manual  
for this connection.  
• Do not make connections A and E at the same  
time.  
• Not all TVs respond to the functions above.  
• When you connect the recorder to your TV via  
the SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to  
the recorder automatically when you start  
playback. If necessary, press the TV t button  
on the remote to return the input to the TV.  
• If you connect the recorder to a TV with  
SMARTLINK, set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in  
the “Video In/Out” setup.  
*1  
“MEGALOGIC” is a registered trademark of  
Grundig Corporation.  
“EASYLINK” and “CINEMALINK” are  
trademarks of Philips Corporation.  
“Q-Link” and “NexTView Link” are  
trademarks of Panasonic Corporation.  
“EURO VIEW LINK” is a trademark of  
*2  
*3  
*4  
• You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack  
(connection E) to DVI jacks that are not HDCP  
compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).  
• Component video and RGB signals are not  
output when using the HDMI connection.  
Toshiba Corporation.  
“T-V LINK” is a trademark of JVC  
Corporation.  
*5  
About the “Control for HDMI”  
functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Sync  
(for HDMI connections only)  
* This DVD recorder incorporates High-  
Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™)  
technology.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
By connecting Sony components that are  
compatible with the “Control for HDMI”  
function with an HDMI cord (not supplied),  
operation is simplified as below:  
• One-Touch Play (page 74)  
About the SMARTLINK  
features (for SCART  
connections only)  
• System Power-Off  
When you turn the TV off using the power  
button on the TV’s remote, the recorder  
and components compatible with the  
“Control for HDMI” function turn off  
automatically. However, the recorder does  
not turn off while recording or dubbing  
even if you turn off the TV.  
If the connected TV (or other connected  
equipment such as a set top box receiver)  
complies with SMARTLINK, NexTView  
*3  
*1  
*2  
Link , MEGALOGIC , EASYLINK  
,
*2  
*3  
CINEMALINK , Q-Link , EURO VIEW  
*4  
*5  
• ‘BRAVIA’ Sync display  
LINK , or T-V LINK , you can enjoy the  
following SMARTLINK features.  
• TV Direct Rec. (page 39)  
You can control the recorder by pressing  
the SYNC MENU button on the TV’s  
remote.  
• One-Touch Play (page 74)  
• Preset Download  
You can download the tuner preset data  
from your TV to this recorder, and tune the  
recorder according to that data in “Easy  
Setup.”  
b Notes  
• Depending on the connected component, the  
“Control for HDMI” function may not work.  
Refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
the component.  
• NexTView Download  
• You can use the ‘BRAVIA’ Sync display feature  
only when the connected TV has the SYNC  
MENU button. For details on ‘BRAVIA’ Sync,  
refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
the TV.  
You can easily set the timer by using the  
NexTView Download function on your  
TV.  
• To use the ‘BRAVIA’ Sync features, set  
“Control for HDMI” to “On” (default) in the  
“HDMI Output” setup (page 140).  
To prepare for the SMARTLINK features  
Set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in the “Video  
In/Out” setup (page 131) and  
“SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder Only” in  
the “Options” setup (page 141).  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord  
Select one of the following patterns, A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,  
projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to  
listen to sound.  
[Speakers]  
[Speakers]  
Rear (L)  
A
Rear (R)  
Audio component with  
a decoder  
Front (L)  
Front (R)  
Centre  
Subwoofer  
or  
to coaxial/HDMI digital input  
HDMI cord  
(not supplied)  
Coaxial digital cord  
(not supplied)  
to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)  
to HDMI OUT  
DVD recorder  
to LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)  
INPUT  
B
VIDEO  
(white)  
(yellow)  
L
(red)  
(white)  
AUDIO  
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
R
(yellow)*  
(red)  
TV, projector, or  
audio component  
: Signal flow  
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 22).  
If you connect a Sony audio component that  
is compatible with the “Control for HDMI”  
function, refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with the audio component.  
A Digital audio input jack  
*1  
If your audio component has a Dolby  
*2  
Digital, DTS , or MPEG audio decoder and  
a digital input jack, use this connection. You  
can enjoy Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS  
(5.1ch), and MPEG audio (5.1ch) surround  
effects.  
,continued  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
B Audio L/R (left/right) input jacks  
This connection will use your TV’s or audio  
component’s two speakers for sound.  
Step 4: Inserting a  
Conditional Access  
Module (CAM) (RDR-  
HXD795/HXD895/  
z Hint  
For correct speaker location, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with the connected  
components.  
HXD995/HXD1095 only)  
b Notes  
• Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to  
the LINE IN (R-AUDIO-L) jacks at the same  
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come  
from your TV’s speakers.  
Insert a conditional access module (CAM)  
provided by your service provider to receive  
scrambled digital broadcasting. This  
recorder is designed to work with modules  
that support the DVB standard. Contact your  
service provider to obtain the right kind of  
CAM.  
• With connection B, do not connect the LINE IN  
(R-AUDIO-L) and LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)  
jacks to your TV’s audio output jacks at the same  
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come  
from your TV’s speakers.  
• With connection A, after you have completed  
the connection, make the appropriate settings in  
the “Audio Out” setup (page 133). Otherwise, no  
sound or a loud noise will come from your  
speakers.  
Insert the CAM into the CAM slot as far as  
it will go.  
• When you connect the recorder to an audio  
component using an HDMI cord, you will need  
to do one of the following:  
– Connect the audio component to the TV with  
the HDMI cord, or  
– Connect the recorder to the TV with a video  
cord other than HDMI cord (component video  
cord, S-video cord, or audio/video cord).  
*1  
To remove the CAM  
Press Z located on the right side of the CAM  
slot.  
*2  
b Notes  
• The CAM slot accepts only Type I and Type II  
PC cards. Do not insert other cards or  
unacceptable objects into the CAM slot.  
• Do not remove or insert the CAM while  
receiving broadcasts. This will cause the picture  
not to be displayed.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Step 5: Connecting the  
Mains Lead  
Step 6: Preparing the  
Remote  
Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC  
IN terminal of the recorder. Then plug the  
recorder and TV mains leads (AC power  
cords) into the mains. After you connect the  
mains lead, you must wait for a short  
while before operating the recorder.  
You can operate the recorder once the front  
panel display lights up and the recorder  
enters standby mode.  
You can control the recorder using the  
supplied remote. Insert two R6 (size AA)  
batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on  
the batteries to the markings inside the  
battery compartment. When using the  
remote, point it at the remote sensor  
the recorder.  
on  
If you connect additional equipment to this  
recorder (page 34), be sure to connect the  
mains lead after all connections are  
complete.  
b Notes  
• If the supplied remote interferes with your other  
Sony DVD recorder or player, change the  
command mode number for this recorder  
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible  
leakage and corrosion. Should leakage occur, do  
not touch the liquid with bare hands. Observe the  
following:  
to AC IN  
1
2
to mains  
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or  
batteries of different manufacturers.  
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.  
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an  
extended period of time, remove the batteries.  
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid  
inside the battery compartment, and insert new  
batteries.  
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked  
the front panel) to strong light, such as direct  
sunlight or a lighting apparatus. The recorder  
may not respond to the remote.  
on  
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the  
code number and Command Mode may be reset  
to the default setting. Set the appropriate code  
number and Command Mode again.  
,continued  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Code numbers of controllable TVs  
If more than one code number is listed,  
try entering them one at a time until you  
find the one that works with your TV.  
Controlling TVs with the  
remote  
You can adjust the remote’s signal to control  
your TV.  
Manufacturer  
Sony  
Code number  
01 (default)  
b Notes  
Grundig  
Hitachi  
ITT  
11  
• Depending on the connected unit, you may not  
be able to control your TV with some or all of the  
buttons below.  
24  
15, 16  
• If you enter a new code number, the code  
number previously entered will be erased.  
JVC  
33  
LG/Goldstar  
Loewe  
76  
45  
Number  
buttons  
Nokia  
15, 16, 69, 73  
17, 49  
Panasonic  
Philips  
TV/DVD  
06, 07, 08, 72  
12, 13, 74  
22, 23, 71  
25  
Saba  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
29  
DISPLAY  
Telefunken  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
36  
43, 75  
38  
TV [/1  
TV t  
The remote performs the following:  
TV 2 +/–  
TV PROG  
+/–  
Buttons  
Operations  
TV [/1  
Turns your TV on or  
off.  
1 Hold down TV [/1 located at the  
bottom of the remote.  
TV 2 (volume) Adjusts the volume  
+/–  
of your TV.  
Do not press the [/1 button at the top of  
the remote.  
TV PROG +/–  
Selects the  
programme position  
on your TV.  
2 With TV [/1 pressed down, enter the  
TV’s manufacturer code using the  
number buttons.  
TV t (input  
select)  
Switches your TV’s  
input source.  
For instance, to enter “09,” press “0”  
then “9.” After you enter the last  
number, release the TV [/1 button.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To operate the TV/DVD button  
(for SCART connections only)  
Changing programme  
positions of the recorder using  
the remote  
The TV/DVD button switches between TV  
mode and DVD mode. Press the TV/DVD  
button when in stop mode or no menu  
appears on the TV screen. Point your remote  
at the recorder when using this button.  
TV mode: switch to this when you use the  
TV’s tuner mainly. When you start  
playback, the input source for the TV is set  
to the recorder automatically.  
DVD mode: switch to this when you use the  
recorder’s tuner mainly.  
To check the current mode, press DISPLAY  
You can change programme positions of the  
recorder using the number buttons.  
Example: for channel 50  
Press “5,” “0,” then press ENTER.  
z Hint  
If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL  
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks,  
you can switch between digital broadcasting and  
analogue broadcasting using the INPUT button.  
If you have a Sony DVD player  
or more than one Sony DVD  
recorder  
If the supplied remote interferes with your  
other Sony DVD recorder or player, set the  
command mode number for this recorder  
and the supplied remote to one that differs  
from the other Sony DVD recorder or player  
after you have completed “Step 7: Easy  
Setup.”  
The default command mode setting for this  
recorder and the supplied remote is “3  
(Default setting).”  
You can check the current Command Mode  
in the front panel display. For details, see  
page 141.  
The default command mode setting for this  
recorder and the supplied remote is “3  
(Default setting).”  
The remote does not function if different  
command modes are set for the recorder  
and remote. Set the same command mode.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 Select “Start” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Step 7: Easy Setup  
Follow the on-screen instructions to  
make the following settings.  
Make the basic adjustments by following the  
on-screen instructions in “Easy Setup.”  
Be careful not to disconnect the cables or  
exit the “Easy Setup” function during this  
procedure.  
Aerial Power (for RDR-HXD795/  
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095 (except  
models for the UK) only)  
Selects whether to supply the power to  
the indoor aerial connected to the  
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack.  
• To supply the power whether the  
recorder is turned on or in standby,  
select “On.”  
[/1  
• To supply the power only when the  
recorder is turned on, select “Auto.”  
Select “Off” to not supply the power.  
GUIDE  
D.TV Auto Channel Setting  
• If the aerial cable is connected to the  
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup  
A or B), select “Auto Scan.” Then,  
select your country/region using </  
,, and press ENTER. The recorder  
will automatically capture and store  
the available TV and Radio channels.  
• If the aerial cable is connected to the  
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup  
C or D) only, select “Do not set.”  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT/  
RETURN  
O
TV [/1  
For details, see page 18.  
1 Turn on the recorder and your TV.  
Then switch the input selector on your  
TV so that the signal from the  
A.TV Auto Channel Setting  
• If the aerial cable is connected to the  
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (except  
hookup A) and the TV is connected to  
this recorder not using SMARTLINK,  
select “Auto Scan.” Then, select your  
country/region using </,, and  
press ENTER. The programme  
recorder appears on your TV screen.  
The “Language” display appears.  
• If the “Language” display does not  
appear, select “Easy Setup” in the  
“Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in  
the System Menu (page 125).  
position order will be set according to  
the country/region you set.  
2 Select a language for the on-screen  
displays using </M/m/,, and  
press ENTER.  
The initial settings message appears.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• If the aerial cable is connected to the  
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (except  
hookup A) and the TV is connected to  
this recorder with SMARTLINK,  
select “Download from TV” (For  
details, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with your TV).  
Then, select your country/region using  
</,, and press ENTER. The tuner  
preset data will be downloaded from  
your TV to this recorder.  
• If the aerial cable is connected to the  
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup  
A) only, or to skip this setting, select  
“Do not set.” Then, select your  
country/region using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
EPG Type Select  
Select the EPG (Electronic Programme  
Guide) type to use.  
If no programme positions for digital  
broadcasts are found after scanning, the  
“EPG Type Select” display does not  
appear. The EPG type is automatically  
set to the country/area you select when  
setting the programme positions.  
• Select “Guide (Digital)” to use the  
digital electronic programme guide  
Select “Guide (Digital)” if you receive  
only digital broadcasts.  
To set the programme positions  
manually, see page 126.  
For details, see page 18.  
Clock Setting  
The recorder will automatically set the  
clock when any digital channels have  
been scanned and stored. Go to the  
“EPG Type Select” setting.  
• Select “Auto” when a programme  
position in your local area broadcasts a  
time signal. The “Auto Clock Setting”  
display appears.  
Select a programme position that  
carries a time signal and then “Start”  
using </,/m, and press ENTER.  
If a clock signal cannot be found, press  
O RETURN, and set the clock  
manually.  
• Select “Manual” to set the clock  
manually. The “Manual Clock  
Setting” display appears.  
• Select “GUIDE Plus+” to use the  
Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ electronic  
programme guide (see page 61).  
• If you have a wide-screen TV, select  
“Wide (16:9).”  
• If you have a standard TV, select  
“Standard (4:3).” This will determine  
how “wide-screen” images are  
displayed on your TV.  
Progressive  
When you connect a progressive format  
TV to this recorder using the  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks,  
select “Compatible.”  
HDD caution messages  
Read the HDD caution messages, and  
press ENTER.  
1
2
3
Select the time zone for your area  
or GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)  
using </,, and press m.  
4 Select “Finish Setup” using M/m,  
Select “On” using </, if you  
are now on summer time, and  
press ENTER.  
and press ENTER.  
“Easy Setup” is completed.  
system (For analogue broadcasting/in  
areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)”  
(page 32) to use the Gemstar GUIDE  
Plus+ electronic programme guide.  
Set the day, month, year, hour and  
minutes using </M/m/,, and  
press ENTER to start the clock.  
To return to the previous step  
Press O RETURN.  
,continued  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
z Hint  
External Receiver 1/External  
Receiver 2/External Receiver 3 (only  
when connecting the set top box  
receiver)  
If you want to run “Easy Setup” again, select  
“Easy Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial  
Setup” in the System Menu (page 125).  
1
2
Press ENTER to select “Continue.”  
®
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+  
Select the set top box receiver type  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
system (For analogue  
broadcasting/in areas with  
GUIDE Plus+ only)  
3
4
Select the provider using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Select the receiver brand using M/  
m, and press ENTER.  
If you select “Other providers,” you  
can select a receiver brand from a  
list of all available brands.  
If your receiver brand is not on the  
list, select “???.”  
Follow the instructions below to set up the  
GUIDE Plus+ system and use the connected  
set top box receiver.  
1 Press GUIDE.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Basic  
Setup” appears.  
The receiver brand list is  
automatically updated, so your  
receiver may be available at a later  
date. Select your brand when it  
becomes available. Until then, use  
“???.”  
5
Select the connection you used for  
your set top box receiver using M/  
m, and press ENTER.  
When the set top box receiver is  
connected to the recorder using  
hookup C with both an aerial cable  
and a SCART cord, select either  
“Line1” or “Antenna.”  
2 Select an item using M/m, and press  
ENTER. Then set each item.  
Language  
Select a language for the on-screen  
displays using M/m, and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
6
7
Press ENTER to select “Continue.”  
The Video Window switches to the  
specified programme position.  
Country  
Select a country/area using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Select “YES” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Postal Code  
Enter your postal code using </M/m/  
,, and press ENTER.  
If “Country” is set to “Others,” you  
cannot enter a postal code and the  
GUIDE Plus+ system will not search for  
a host channel.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
If the Video Window does not  
switch to the specified programme  
position, select “NO” and press  
ENTER until the Video Window  
switches to the specified  
• If you do not need to set up the GUIDE  
Plus+ system, press SYSTEM MENU  
to exit.  
programme position.  
• Even if you cannot use the GUIDE  
Plus+ system where you live, you can  
still set up a manual recording. See  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Turn off the recorder to receive GUIDE  
Plus+ system data.  
To fix the set top box controller to your set  
top box receiver  
Once you have confirmed that the set top  
box controller controls your set top box  
receiver, fix it in place.  
To receive GUIDE Plus+ system  
data your recorder must be turned off  
when not in use. If your recorder is  
connected to a set top box receiver,  
be sure to leave the set top box  
receiver turned on. After initial  
setup, it may take up to 24 hours to  
begin receiving TV programme  
listings.  
1
Remove the backing on the double-  
sided tape.  
2
Attach it so that the set top box  
controller is directly above the remote  
control sensor on your set top box  
receiver.  
b Note  
You cannot set tuner system or “OSD Language”  
to a country/region or language that is not  
supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
If you cannot get the recorder to control  
your set top box receiver  
Check the connection and position of the set  
top box controller (page 20).  
If your set top box receiver still does not  
operate with this recorder, refer to the  
instructions supplied with your set top box  
receiver and contact your cable or satellite  
company to see if they can provide you with  
a compatible set top box receiver.  
To change the basic GUIDE Plus+ settings  
1
2
Press GUIDE.  
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar using M/  
,, and press ENTER.  
3
4
Select “Basic Setup” using M/m, and  
b Notes  
press ENTER.  
• The list of external receivers controllable by the  
GUIDE Plus+ system is updated constantly and  
is distributed through GUIDE Plus+ system data  
signals. Since the time your recorder has been  
produced and the time you installed your  
recorder for the first time, new external receiver  
codes might have been added.  
Repeat from step 2 of “Setting up the  
®
GUIDE Plus+ system (For analogue  
• If the external receiver is still not on the list or is  
not controlled properly by the recorder, please  
call Customer Support to report the brand and  
model of your external receiver.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device  
After disconnecting the recorder’s mains lead from the mains, connect a VCR or similar  
recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder.  
Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack)  
For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.  
To record on this recorder, see “Recording from Connected Equipment” on page 60.  
Connecting to the LINE 1/DECODER jack  
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 1/DECODER jack of this recorder.  
VCR  
TV  
SCART cord (not supplied)  
to SCART input  
to i LINE 1/DECODER  
to T LINE 3 – TV  
DVD recorder  
b Notes  
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.  
• If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.  
DVD recorder  
VCR  
TV  
Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below. To watch  
video tapes, watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.  
Line input 1  
VCR  
DVD recorder  
TV  
Line input 2  
• The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder’s LINE 1/  
DECODER jack.  
• To watch the connected VCR or similar device’s pictures through the recorder while the recorder is in  
standby mode, set “Power Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic” setup (page 125).  
• When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder, do not switch the input source to TV by pressing  
the TV/DVD button on the remote.  
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected  
VCR.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel  
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the  
equipment has an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord.  
VCR, etc.  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO  
L
R
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
Audio/video cord  
(not supplied)  
to LINE 2 IN  
DVD recorder  
: Signal flow  
z Hint  
When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect to only the L(MONO) and VIDEO  
input jacks on the front of the recorder. Do not connect the R input jack.  
b Notes  
• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.  
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other  
equipment’s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. This may cause noise (feedback).  
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting an External Decoder  
You can watch or record external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder)  
programmes if you connect a decoder (not supplied) to the recorder. Disconnect the recorder’s  
mains lead from the mains when connecting the decoder. Note that when you set “LINE 1 In”  
programme positions” (page 37), you will not be able to select “L1” because Line 1 will  
become a dedicated line for the decoder.  
Connecting a decoder  
External decoder (PAY-TV/  
Canal Plus analogue decoder)  
TV  
to AERIAL IN  
Aerial cable  
(supplied)  
to SCART input  
SCART cord  
(not supplied)  
SCART cord  
(not supplied)  
to T LINE 3 – TV  
to AERIAL OUT  
to i LINE 1/DECODER  
DVD recorder  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
12 Select your country/region, and press  
Setting external decoder (PAY-  
TV/Canal Plus analogue  
ENTER.  
Programme position  
decoder) programme positions  
To watch or record PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
analogue programmes, set your recorder to  
receive the programme positions using the  
on-screen display.  
In order to set the programme positions  
correctly, be sure to follow all of the steps  
below.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
13 Select the desired programme  
position using PROG +/– or number  
buttons.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
14 Select “Channel” using M/m, and  
select the external decoder  
3 Select “Video In/Out,” and press  
ENTER.  
programme position using </,.  
15 Select “Sound System” using M/m,  
and select an available TV system, B/  
G, D/K, I, or L using </,.  
To receive broadcasts in France, select  
“L.”  
4 Select “LINE 3 Out,” and press  
ENTER.  
16 Select “Decoder” using M/m, and  
select “On” using </,.  
17 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit the  
menu.  
5 Press M/m to select “Video” or  
To return to the previous step  
“RGB,” and press ENTER.  
Press O RETURN.  
6 Select “LINE 1 In,” and press ENTER.  
b Notes  
7 Press M/m to select “Decoder,” and  
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you  
will not be able to view the signals from the  
connected decoder.  
press ENTER.  
8 Press O RETURN to return the  
• To watch the connected external decoder (PAY-  
TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes  
during recording, press the PROGRAM + button  
on the recorder (“SCART THRU” appears on  
the front panel display). To return to the previous  
display, press the PROGRAM – button on the  
recorder (“SCART NORM” appears on the front  
panel display). The recorder automatically  
switches to the programme tuned by the  
recorder’s tuner after the recording has finished.  
To watch the connected external decoder (PAY-  
TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes  
while the recorder is in standby mode, set  
“Power Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic”  
cursor to the left column.  
9 Select “Analog Tuner,” and press  
ENTER.  
10 Select “Manual CH Setting,” and  
press ENTER.  
11 Select “Next Screen,” and press  
ENTER.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Seven Basic Operations  
2. Recording a  
Programme  
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder  
1. Inserting a Disc  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
+
RW  
+
RVR  
RVideo  
-
-
-
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
R
-
RVideo  
DVD VCD CD  
DATA DVD  
This section introduces the basic operation  
to record a current TV programme to the  
hard disk (HDD) or to a disc (DVD). For an  
explanation of how to make timer  
recordings, see page 53 (Digital  
broadcasting) or page 66 (Analogue  
broadcasting).  
DATA CD  
Z (open/  
close)  
DVD  
HDD  
DVD  
PROG +/–  
1 Press DVD.  
INPUT  
2 Press Z (open/close), and place a  
disc on the disc tray.  
X
Recording/playing side facing down  
z REC  
x REC  
STOP  
REC MODE  
3 Press Z (open/close) to close the  
disc tray.  
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the  
front panel display.  
Unused DVDs are formatted  
automatically.  
• For DVD-RW discs  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you want to record to a DVD, insert a  
recordable DVD.  
DVD-RWs are formatted in the  
recording format (VR mode or Video  
mode) set by “Format DVD-RW” of  
“Basic” in the “Disc Setup” setup  
2 Press PROG +/– to select the  
programme position or input source  
you want to record.  
To switch between digital broadcasting  
and analogue broadcasting, press  
INPUT. (Available when the aerial  
cables are connected to both DIGITAL  
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL  
IN jacks only.)  
• For DVD-R discs  
DVD-Rs are automatically formatted  
in Video mode. To format an unused  
DVD-R in VR mode, format the disc  
in the “Format” setup (page 49)  
before you make a recording.  
If the disc is recordable on this recorder,  
you can manually re-format the disc to  
make a blank disc (page 49).  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Notes  
3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select  
the recording mode.  
• To turn off the TV Direct Rec. function, set  
“SMARTLINK” to “Pass Through” in the  
“Options” setup (page 141).  
Each time you press the button, the  
display on the TV screen changes as  
follows:  
• Some buttons, such as the TITLE LIST button or  
H button, do not work when “TV” appears in  
the front panel display.  
• If you press the [/1 button while recording, the  
recorder stops recording and turns off.  
• After pressing the z REC button, it may take a  
short while to start recording.  
• It may take a short while for recorder to stop or  
pause recording.  
* Available when “Manual Rec. Mode” is set  
to “On (go to setup)” in the “Recording”  
For more details about the recording  
mode, see page 154.  
• You cannot change the recording mode while  
recording.  
• Programmes are recorded in the following aspect  
ratio.  
4 Press z REC.  
Recording starts.  
– In the original aspect ratio, when recording to  
the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is  
set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”  
setup (page 137))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode).  
To stop recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
– In 4:3 when recording to DVD+RWs/  
DVD+Rs.  
• When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode),  
the title is divided when the layer switches.  
• If there is a power failure, the programme you  
are recording may be erased.  
• You cannot watch a PAY-TV/Canal Plus  
programme while recording another PAY-TV/  
Canal Plus programme.  
• To use the TV Direct Rec. function, you must  
first correctly set the recorder’s clock.  
To pause recording  
Press X.  
To resume recording, press X again.  
To watch another TV programme while  
recording  
If your TV is connected to the T LINE 3 –  
TV jack, set your TV to the TV input using  
the TV/DVD button and select the  
programme you want to watch. If your TV is  
connected to the LINE 2 OUT or  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the  
TV to TV input using the TV t button  
TV Direct Rec. (for SMARTLINK  
connections only)  
When the TV is turned on and the recorder is  
turned off, press TV PAUSE. The recorder  
automatically turns on and starts recording  
what you are watching on the TV to the  
HDD.  
Set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 142).  
,continued  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Checking the disc status while  
recording  
3. Playing the Recorded  
Programme (Title List)  
You can check the recording information  
such as recording time or disc type.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
Press DISPLAY during recording.  
The recording information appears.  
To play a recorded title, select the title from  
the Title List.  
HDD  
DVD  
TITLE LIST  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
A Recording mode  
B Recording time  
C Disc type/format  
D Recording status  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a DVD (see “1.  
Playback starts automatically depending  
on the disc.  
To turn off the display  
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
Example: 4-Title List for HDD  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A Disc type:  
Displays the media type, HDD or DVD.  
To stop playback  
Press x (stop).  
B Total number of titles  
To scroll the list display by page (Page  
mode)  
C Sub-menu:  
Press , to display the sub-menu.  
The sub-menu displays options  
applicable only to the selected item. The  
displayed options differ depending upon  
the model, situation, and disc type.  
Press ./> while the Title List is  
displayed. Each time you press ./>,  
the Title List changes to the previous/next  
page of titles.  
About the Title List for DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs  
(VR mode)  
You can switch the Title List to show  
Original or Playlist titles.  
1
2
3
Press < while the Title List is  
displayed.  
Select “Play List” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Sub-menu  
Select “Original” or “Play List” using  
M/m, and press ENTER.  
D Scroll bar:  
Appears when all of the titles do not fit  
on the list. To view the hidden titles,  
press M/m.  
To change the title order for HDD (Sort  
Titles)  
E Title information:  
1
2
3
Press < while the Title List is  
“Recording”: Indicates that the title is  
currently being recorded.  
: Indicates a protected title.  
“NEW”: Indicates that the title is newly  
recorded (not played back) (HDD only).  
: Press DISPLAY to display  
displayed.  
Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Select the item using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
.” “  
” indicates titles  
Order  
Sorted  
containing “Copy-Once” copy  
protection signals (HDD only)  
: Indicates that the title is recorded  
using the Update function.  
Genre icons: Indicates the title’s genre  
(HDD only).  
By Date  
In order of when the titles  
were recorded. The title  
that is recorded most  
recently is listed at the  
top.  
Unseen Title In order of when the titles  
were recorded. The title  
: Indicates a bilingual programme  
(HDD only).  
that is recorded most  
recently and has not been  
played is listed at the top.  
F Remaining time of the current disc in  
the current recording mode (example:  
SP mode)  
By Title  
In alphabetical order.  
By Number  
In order of recorded title  
number.  
3 Select a title using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
,continued  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To search for a title by genre (HDD only)  
To change the thumbnail preview mode  
(Set Preview) (HDD only)  
You can select “Quick Preview” or  
“Normal” for the thumbnail preview mode  
in the Title List. Set “Set Preview” in the  
“Options” setup (page 142).  
1
2
3
Press < while the Title List is  
displayed.  
Select “Genre” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Select a genre using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
To switch to the 8 Title List  
1
2
3
Press < while the Title List is  
To change a title thumbnail picture  
(Thumbnail)  
After recording, the first scene of the  
recording (the title) is automatically set as  
the thumbnail picture.  
displayed.  
Select “Title View” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Select “8 Titles” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Detailed information, including the  
resumption time, for the selected title is  
shown below the list.  
You can select a favourite scene for the  
thumbnail picture shown in the Title List.  
1
Press TITLE LIST.  
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode),  
switch the Title List to show Original or  
Playlist titles, if necessary.  
2
3
4
Select a title using M/m, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
Select “Edit” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Select “Set Thumbnail” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
The display for setting the thumbnail  
point appears and the title starts to play.  
To turn off the Title List  
Press TITLE LIST.  
5
6
While watching the playback picture,  
b Notes  
press H, X, c  
m/M  
C
• The title names may not appear for DVDs  
created on other DVD recorders.  
or PLAY MODE to select the scene you  
want to set for a thumbnail picture, and  
press X.  
• It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail  
pictures to be displayed.  
Playback pauses.  
• After editing, the title thumbnail picture may  
change to the first scene of the recording (title).  
• After dubbing, the title thumbnail picture set on  
the source recording is cancelled.  
• In some areas, letters or symbols that the  
recorder cannot record or display are replaced  
with “*.”  
Select “OK” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The scene is set for the title’s thumbnail  
picture.  
To return to the Title List, press  
O RETURN.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
E Station name and programme position  
Displaying the playing time  
and play information  
number  
F Audio setting for the current  
programme  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
G Recording restrictions for the current  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
CD  
programme  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
H TV mode or DVD mode (page 29)  
You can check the playing time of the  
current title, chapter, track, or disc. Also,  
you can check the disc name recorded on the  
DVD/CD.  
I Disc information  
J Title type (Original or Playlist) for  
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode  
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.  
K Disc type/format (page 151)  
Displays the finalised disc in Video  
mode as “DVD-VIDEO.”  
The displays differ depending on the disc  
type or playing status.  
L Title number-Chapter number  
In stop mode  
Example: DVD-RW in VR mode  
M Playing time  
N Multi-angles indicator (page 75)  
O Copy-protected indicator (page 157)  
P Data transfer bar and rate  
To turn off the display  
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.  
z Hints  
During playback  
Example: DVD-R in Video mode  
• When “On Screen Display” is set to “On”  
(default) in the “Options” setup (page 141),  
information automatically appears on the screen  
when the recorder is operated.  
• To increase disc space, see “To open up disc  
b Note  
Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be  
displayed correctly.  
A Playing status  
B Shows that the Resume Play is  
available (page 74).  
C Current selected recording mode  
(maximum DVD recording time)  
D Remaining time  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 Select “Title Name” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
4. Changing the Name of  
a Recorded Programme  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
The current name is displayed at the  
input row.  
+
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
RW  
Input row  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
You can label a DVD, title, or programme by  
entering characters. You can enter up to 64  
characters for a title recorded in the HDD/  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), 40  
characters for a title recorded in the  
DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode), but the  
actual number of characters displayed in the  
menus such as the Title List will vary. The  
steps below explain how to change the name  
of the recorded programme.  
5 Move the cursor to the point where  
you want to insert the character using  
m/M.  
To erase all of the characters, press and  
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.  
6 Select “Upper case” or “Lower case”  
using ./>.  
The characters for the selected type are  
displayed.  
TITLE LIST  
7 Press </M/m/, to select the  
character you want to enter, and  
press ENTER.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
The selected character appears at the  
input row.  
To insert a space, press X (or select  
“Space,” and press ENTER).  
.
m
>
M
x
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the  
remaining characters.  
To erase a character, move the cursor to  
the character at the input row, and press  
CLEAR (or select “Clear,” and press  
ENTER).  
To insert a character, move the cursor to  
the right of the point where you want to  
insert the character. Then select the  
character, and press ENTER.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
2 Select a title using M/m, and press  
,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press  
To erase all of the characters, press and  
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.  
ENTER.  
9 Press x (or select “OK,” and press  
ENTER).  
To cancel the setting, press  
O RETURN.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.  
5. Labelling and  
Protecting a Disc  
You can execute options effective for the  
entire disc in the “Disc Setup” setup.  
5 Select “Input Disc Name,” and press  
ENTER.  
6 Select “Next Screen,” and press  
ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
Enter the disc name (page 44).  
You can enter up to 64 characters for a  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) disc  
name, and 40 characters for a  
DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) disc  
name.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
b Note  
The disc name may not appear when the disc is  
played on other DVD equipment.  
Labelling a disc  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
-
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
Protecting a disc  
-
RVideo  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
1 Insert a disc.  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
,continued  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.  
6. Playing the Disc on  
Other DVD Equipment  
(Finalise)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
-
RVR  
RWVR RWVideo  
R
-
RVideo  
Finalising is necessary when you play discs  
recorded with this recorder on other DVD  
equipment.  
5 Select “Protect Disc,” and press  
ENTER.  
When you finalise a DVD+RW, DVD-RW  
(Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video  
mode), a DVD menu will be automatically  
created, which can be displayed on other  
DVD equipment.  
Before finalising, check the differences  
between the disc types in the table below.  
Differences between disc types  
6 Select “On,” and press ENTER.  
7 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
Discs are automatically finalised  
+
RW  
when removed from the recorder.  
However, you may need to finalise  
the disc for certain DVD  
equipment, or if the recording time  
is short. You can edit or record on  
the disc even after finalising.  
To cancel the protection  
Select “Off” in step 6.  
Finalising is unnecessary when  
playing a disc on VR format  
compatible equipment.  
Even if your other DVD equipment  
is VR format compatible, you may  
need to finalise the disc, especially  
if the recording time is short. You  
can edit or record on the disc even  
after finalising.  
-
RWVR  
z Hint  
You can set protection for individual titles  
Finalising is necessary when  
playing on any equipment other  
than this recorder.  
-
RWVideo  
After finalising, you cannot edit or  
record on the disc. If you want to  
record on it again, unfinalise  
(page 48) or reformat the disc  
(page 49). However, if you  
reformat the disc, all recorded  
contents will be erased.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.  
Finalising is necessary. The disc  
can be played only on equipment  
that supports DVD-R in VR mode.  
You can edit or record on the disc  
even after finalising (except DVD-  
R DL in VR mode).  
-
RVR  
Finalising is necessary when  
playing on any equipment other  
than this recorder.  
+
R
-
RVideo  
After finalising, you cannot edit or  
record on the disc.  
5 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.  
6 Select “Next Screen,” and press  
ENTER.  
For DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), the  
recorder starts finalising the disc. Go to  
step 9.  
7 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)  
Select a title menu style, and press  
ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
The menu appears in the selected title  
menu style when the “top menu” (or  
“menu” for a DVD+RW/DVD+R) is  
selected on the DVD equipment.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
8 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)  
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts finalising the disc.  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
9 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
z Hint  
You can check whether the disc has been finalised  
or not. Press DISPLAY after step 1 (page 43).  
b Notes  
• Depending on the condition of the disc,  
recording, or the DVD equipment, discs may not  
play even if the discs are finalised.  
• The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc  
if it was recorded on another recorder.  
• Inserting an unfinalised disc into other DVD  
equipment may damage the recorded contents.  
• When using a DVD+RW, you can edit or record  
on the disc even after finalising. However, the  
title menu will not be displayed. Finalise the disc  
again to display the title menu.  
,continued  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Select “Unfinalise,” and press  
ENTER.  
Unfinalising a disc  
-
-
RWVR RWVideo  
For DVD-RWs (Video mode)  
DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been  
finalised to prohibit additional recording or  
editing can be unfinalised to allow further  
recording or editing.  
For DVD-RWs (VR mode)  
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts unfinalising the disc.  
Unfinalising may take several minutes.  
If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW  
(VR mode) that has been finalised with other  
DVD equipment, unfinalise the disc.  
b Note  
The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD-RWs  
(Video mode) that have been finalised on another  
recorder.  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Select “Format,” and press ENTER.  
7. Reformatting a Disc  
+
RW  
-
-
-
-
RVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
RVR  
New discs are automatically formatted when  
inserted. If necessary, you can manually re-  
format a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, or DVD-R  
disc to make a blank disc. For DVD-RWs or  
DVD-Rs, you can select a recording format  
(VR mode or Video mode) according to your  
needs.  
5 Select an item, and press ENTER.  
“VR Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/DVD-  
Rs in VR mode.  
Video Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs in Video mode.  
“Format DVD+RW”: Formats  
DVD+RWs.  
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
All contents on the disc are erased.  
SYSTEM  
MENU  
z Hint  
By reformatting, you can change the recording  
format on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-  
RWs that have been finalised.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
b Note  
You cannot reformat recorded DVD-Rs.  
1 Insert a disc.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press  
ENTER.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Press GUIDE.  
This display consists of an information box  
and an 8-channel programme list covering a  
30-minute period.  
Guide to Digital Services  
(For Freeview)  
Viewing the EPG  
(Electronic Programme  
Guide) Display  
Example of EPG Display:  
The Electronic Programme Guide is a guide  
showing the television programme schedule  
for a day or more at a time on your television  
(via the Digital Terrestrial Television tuner  
included in this recorder).  
A Indicates the currently selected  
channel number and station name  
with the programme title and genre.  
The EPG provides a quick and easy way to:  
• View a complete list of all available  
channels.  
• View a channel list related to a chosen date  
or genre.  
B Indicates the currently selected  
programme and allows you to move  
around the list.  
• Set a programme to be recorded (page 53).  
Press ENTER to watch the selected  
programme.  
b Notes  
• Digital Services availability and content depend  
on the broadcaster.  
C Channel name  
• Digital Services are not instantly available when  
the recorder is first turned on.  
• In some areas, not all programme information is  
displayed if you display the EPG while  
recording.  
D Indicates if a timer recording is  
associated with the programme  
E Colour buttons  
Press the same colour button on the  
remote (“Timer,” “Jump,” and  
“Search”).  
F Truncated programme title in case the  
name is too long to be displayed in the  
cell.  
Red button  
Blue button  
Yellow button  
Green button  
G Indicates that short programmes that  
are not displayed on the list are  
scheduled.  
GUIDE  
INFO  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
EXIT/  
RETURN  
O
H Time slot  
PAGE +  
PAGE –  
I Indicates the current time and date.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Available buttons in the programme list  
Programme Information  
Buttons  
Operations  
</M/m/,  
PAGE +/–  
Selects the desired item.  
You can view descriptions of the  
programmes being broadcast now and next.  
Displays the previous/next  
eight channels.  
INFO  
Displays the detailed  
information of the  
Displaying the programme  
information  
programme (page 51).  
Colour buttons Activates the same colour  
(red, yellow,  
green, blue)  
function on the screen.  
Closes the display.  
1 Select a channel.  
2 Press INFO.  
O
RETURN  
The Information display appears  
showing a description of the current  
programme on view.  
Available buttons in the Information  
display  
Buttons  
Operations  
M/m  
Toggles the display  
between description of the  
current/next programme.  
</,  
Displays programme  
information for other  
channels.  
ENTER  
INFO  
Displays the selected  
channel.  
Displays the detailed  
programme information.  
Viewing Teletext (not  
available in some areas)  
You can view the Teletext that comes  
simultaneously with certain programmes.  
Press  
(text).  
The Teletext screen appears.  
You can also use any of colour buttons.  
To exit the Teletext service  
Press  
(text) again.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Selecting digital text from  
other channels  
Viewing a Digital Text  
Service (models for the  
UK only)  
Digital text services may also be available  
on other digital channels. This is sometimes  
indicated by a small symbol on your TV  
screen, superimposed on the programme you  
are watching.  
Many digital TV channels broadcast  
information via their text service. This  
digital service includes high-quality digital  
text and graphics along with advanced  
navigation options. Additionally, this  
recorder has access to dedicated text  
channels transmitted by the broadcasters.  
1 Select a channel.  
2 Press  
(text) or the button  
indicated on screen by the  
broadcaster.  
b Note  
The text information appears.  
The appearance, content and navigation methods  
of all digital text services are decided by the  
broadcaster.  
3 Access required information using  
</M/m/,, the colour buttons and/  
or the number buttons.  
Selecting digital text from  
dedicated digital teletext  
channels  
To exit the text service  
Follow the on-screen instructions, or press  
(text) or EXIT/O RETURN.  
1 Select a dedicated channel that is  
broadcasting digital text.  
You can search for a dedicated digital  
text channel using the “Electronic  
Programme Guide” (page 50).  
The text page is displayed.  
2 Once the text page is displayed (this  
may take some time), follow the on-  
screen instructions to obtain your  
required selection.  
On some pages the TV programme may  
also be displayed on the text screen. On-  
screen instructions will inform you how  
to change the displayed programme.  
If you are instructed to press “OK” or  
“Select” when viewing the text pages,  
press ENTER.  
To exit the text service  
Follow the on-screen instructions, or press  
PROG +/–.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Recording (For Freeview)  
Timer Recording (EPG/  
Series/Manual)  
Yellow button  
GUIDE  
Red button  
TIMER  
+
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
RW  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
</M/m/,,  
You can set the timer for a total of 32  
programmes, up to 30 days in advance.  
Methods to set the timer include:  
ENTER  
O
RETURN  
INFO  
• EPG: Set a programme to be recorded  
based on the information provided by the  
EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)  
• Series Recording (models for the UK  
only): Automatically sets the recorder to  
record programmes in a series (page 55).  
• Manual: Set the date, time, and programme  
position of the programme manually.  
x REC  
STOP  
Recording TV programmes  
using the EPG  
Before you start recording…  
• Check that the disc has enough available  
space for the recording (page 43). For the  
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you  
can free up disc space by erasing titles  
The EPG function is a feature that simplifies  
setting the timer. Just select the programme  
you want to record in the EPG display. The  
date, time, and channel of that programme  
are set automatically.  
• Adjust the recording picture quality if  
necessary (page 120).  
1 Press GUIDE.  
b Note  
If digital teletext is operated or subtitles are  
displayed while recording, they will be recorded  
on the disc (page 135).  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,.  
,continued  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 Press the red button.  
The date, start and stop times,  
programme position, recording mode,  
etc., settings appear.  
To search for programmes by genre  
(Search)  
1
Press the yellow button while the  
programme list is displayed.  
2
3
4
Select a date in the “Date” row.  
Select a time in the “Time” row.  
Select the “Genre” row, and press  
ENTER.  
5
Select a genre using </M/m/,, and  
press ENTER.  
6
7
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
Select “Search,” and press ENTER.  
• If you want to change the setting,  
• (Models for the UK only) You can set  
“EPG Link” (page 56) or “Series  
Recording” (page 55).  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
” (red) appears next to the  
programme which is set for timer  
recording. Your recorder will  
automatically begin recording when the  
programme starts.  
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn  
off the recorder before the timer  
recording starts.  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”  
• To modify the timer setting, see  
page 59.  
z Hints  
• When you select “AUTO” for the recording  
mode, the recorder automatically maximises the  
recording quality for the space available on the  
inserted disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on  
to a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD).  
• This recorder is featured with an EPG timer auto  
extend functionality that allows EPG timer  
recordings to be made in case of an early start  
(before the scheduled start time) or late finish  
(after the scheduled end time).  
To search for programmes by date  
(Jump)  
1
Press the green button while the  
programme list is displayed.  
2
3
4
Select a date in the “Date” row.  
Select a time in the “Time” row.  
Select “Jump,” and press ENTER.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Select “Set Details,” and press  
ENTER.  
Recording programmes using  
Series Recording (models for  
the UK only)  
5 Set “Series Recording” to “On,” and  
press O RETURN.  
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The selected programme is set for  
recording and appears in the Timer List  
Series Recording is a feature which allows  
you to automatically record programmes in a  
series, using the information from the EPG.  
You can also search for programmes related  
to the timer settings.  
The other programmes in the series will  
be set for recording (appear in the Timer  
List) as each previous recording is  
completed.  
(red): Indicates that the whole  
programme is set to be recorded.  
(grey): Indicates that the programme  
is set to be recorded using Series  
Recording.  
b Notes  
• This function cannot be used when the  
broadcaster does not include series information  
with the programme data.  
• The timer recordings with “Series Recording”  
set to “On” are recorded to the HDD.  
1 After step 2 of “Recording TV  
INFO.  
• To modify the timer setting, see  
page 59.  
The yellow button (“Series”) in the on-  
screen display is activated when the  
selected programme has series  
information.  
About Split Programmes  
Movies and other programmes that are split  
into 2 or more parts are called Split  
Programmes. If you set the timer for one part  
of a Split Programme, the other parts that  
start within 3 hours are automatically  
recorded. For example, if the first half is set  
to be recorded, the last half will be recorded  
automatically.  
2 Press the yellow button (“Series”).  
Series programmes of the selected  
programme are listed.  
To use this function, set “EPG Link” to “On”  
(default) in step 4 above.  
3 Press the red button.  
The date, start and stop times,  
programme position, recording mode,  
etc., settings appear.  
,continued  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
About EPG Link  
To search for programmes related to the  
timer settings (EPG Link)  
When you set timer recording for a  
programme that has series information, you  
can search for related programmes such as  
listed below.  
To use this function, set “EPG Link” to “On”  
(default) in step 4 above.  
• Repeat programmes: You can search for  
repeat broadcasts of the programme which  
is set for timer recording (Alternate  
Search).  
The EPG Link function automatically  
updates the date, start and stop times of timer  
settings when the broadcaster changes them  
and updates the EPG accordingly. For  
example, if a programme with timer setting  
starts before or ends after the scheduled  
time, the timer setting is automatically  
extended to record the whole programme.  
To use the EPG Link function, set “EPG  
Link” to “On” (default) in step 4 above.  
b Notes  
• Programmes in a series: You can search for  
the next programme in the series of a  
programme which is set for timer  
recording (Series Search).  
• Only the earliest part of the Split Programme is  
displayed on the Timer List.  
• When “EPG Link” is set to “On,” you cannot  
change the date, start and stop time settings.  
• Recommended programmes: You can  
search for recommended programmes  
linked to the programme which is set for  
timer recording (Recommendation  
Search).  
Setting the timer manually  
(Manual)  
1
2
3
Press TIMER.  
1 Press TIMER.  
Select the timer setting, and press ,.  
The “Timer List” display appears.  
When the following options appear in  
the sub-menu, select an option, and  
press ENTER.  
“Alternate Search”: Searches for repeat  
programmes.  
“Series Search”: Searches for  
programmes in a series.  
“Recommendation Search”: Searches  
for programmes recommended by  
broadcaster as a link for current series.  
2 Select the “New Input” row, and  
press ENTER.  
To set the programme for recording,  
follow the instructions for “Recording  
(page 53) from step 2.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Select an item using </, and  
adjust using M/m. Then press  
ENTER.  
To make the detailed settings  
1
Select “Set Details” in step 3 above, and  
press ENTER.  
The adjustable items are listed below.  
“Pr/CH”: Sets the programme position.  
An analogue programme can also be  
selected.  
“Date”: Sets the date (up to 30 days  
later). Select a recording pattern by  
pressing M repeatedly to set the timer  
for the same daily or weekly  
programmes.  
2
Select an item using M/m and set using  
</,.  
“Record to”: Sets the recording  
destination. If there is not enough  
available DVD disc space for the  
recording, the recorder automatically  
records the programme to the HDD even  
if you select “DVD” (Recovery  
Recording).  
“Recording Mode”: Sets the recording  
“VPS/PDC”: Sets the VPS/PDC  
only)” below.  
“Start”: Sets the start time.  
“Stop”: Sets the stop time.  
“Extend”: Sets duration when a timer  
recording is in progress. If the  
programme set to be recorded daily or  
weekly is extended, the manually  
extended time set here will be added to  
the subsequent timer recording times.  
Note that when “VPS/PDC” is set to  
“On,” you cannot make the “Extend”  
setting.  
“Update”: Sets the recorder  
automatically replacing the previous  
timer recording with the new one.  
“Genre”: Sets the genre.  
• (Models for the UK only) For details  
about “EPG Link” and “Series  
Recording,” see “Recording  
You cannot set these items to “On”  
when setting the timer manually.  
• If you make a mistake, select the item  
and change the setting.  
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.  
The “Timer List” display (page 59)  
appears.  
The timer recording indicator lights up  
on the front panel display and the  
recorder is ready to start recording.  
• To record a satellite programme, turn  
on the satellite tuner and select the  
satellite programme you want to  
record. Leave the satellite tuner turned  
on until the recorder finishes  
recording.  
To enter a title name  
Select “Set Title Name” in step 3 above, and  
press ENTER (page 44).  
About the VPS/PDC function (For  
analogue broadcasting only)  
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV  
programmes in some broadcast systems.  
These signals ensure that timer recordings  
are made regardless of any broadcast delays,  
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.  
• To modify the timer setting, see  
page 59.  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
To use the VPS/PDC function  
Set “VPS/PDC” to “On” (see “To make the  
When you turn on this function, the recorder  
starts scanning the channels before the timer  
recording starts.  
z Hint  
You can use the “Rec. Mode Adjust” function  
,continued  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Notes  
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full  
appears on the screen, change the recording  
destination to “DVD,” or make available space  
for the recording (page 83).  
Creating chapters in a title  
The recorder can automatically divide a  
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting  
chapter marks. To select chapter mark  
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto  
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter  
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/  
+RW)” in the “Recording” setup (page 136).  
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR  
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can  
edit chapter marks (page 85).  
• Check that the clock is correctly set before  
setting the timer recording. If not, the timer  
recording cannot be made.  
• Even if the timer is set for the same daily or  
weekly programme, the timer recording cannot  
be made if it overlaps with a programme that has  
priority. “Overlap” will appear next to the  
overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the  
priority order of the settings (page 59).  
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot  
be made while recording a programme that has  
priority.  
• The beginning of some recordings may not be  
made when using the VPS/PDC function.  
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works  
with a timer recording and the VPS/PDC  
function set to off. It does not function with  
Quick Timer.  
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”  
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”  
Using the Quick Timer function  
You can set the recorder to record in 30-  
minute increments.  
Press z REC repeatedly to set the  
duration.  
Each press advances the time in 30-minute  
increments. The maximum duration is six  
hours.  
(normal recording)  
The time counter decreases minute by  
minute to 0:00, then the recorder stops  
recording (the power turns off).  
To cancel the Quick Timer  
Press z REC repeatedly until “0:00”  
appears in the front panel display. The  
recorder returns to normal recording mode.  
To stop recording, press x REC STOP.  
b Note  
If you turn off the recorder during recording,  
recording is stopped.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
“Recommendation Search” (models for  
the UK only) (page 56)  
To change or cancel the setting, repeat  
steps 2 and 3 above.  
Checking/Changing/  
Cancelling Timer  
Settings (Timer List)  
When the timer settings overlap  
• The programme that starts first has priority  
and the entire programme is recorded.  
• After finishing the previous recording, the  
other recording starts with several tens-of-  
second’s delay (when the end-time of one  
recording and the start-time of another are  
the same).  
• When the recordings start at the same time,  
only one of them will be recorded. Cancel  
the timer setting for the programme that  
you are not going to record.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
You can check, change, or cancel the timer  
settings using the Timer List.  
b Note  
(Models for the UK only) To change the EPG  
timer settings, set “EPG Link” to “Off” in “Set  
Details.”  
1 Press TIMER.  
The “Timer List” display appears.  
When all of the timer settings are not  
visible on the display, press M/mto view  
the hidden timer settings.  
z Hints  
• For manual timer settings, you cannot modify  
the timer setting for the current recording, but  
you can extend the duration of the recording time  
while recording (page 57).  
For timer settings using the EPG, you can  
modify the timer setting for the current recording  
while recording, but you cannot extend the  
duration of the recording (even when recording  
is stopped).  
(Models for the UK only) For timer settings  
using the EPG, you can modify the timer setting  
for the current recording while recording, and  
extend the duration of the recording only when  
“EPG Link” is set to “Off.”  
• You can move to the first row/bottom row of the  
Timer List using ./> while the list is  
displayed.  
2 Select the timer setting you want to  
check/change/cancel, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
“Modify”:  
Changes the timer setting.  
Select an item using </, and adjust  
using M/m. Select “OK” and press  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
• When “VPS/PDC” is set to “On” for one or more  
timer recordings, the start times may change in  
the event of a broadcast delay or early start.  
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot  
be made while recording a programme that has  
priority.  
“Erase”:  
Erases the timer setting.  
Select “Yes” and press ENTER.  
“Skip Once”:  
Cancels the daily or weekly recordings  
only once. After cancelling the timer  
setting, “Skip Once” appears next to the  
timer setting in the Timer List.  
“Alternate Search” (models for the UK  
“Series Search” (models for the UK  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
7 Press the pause (or play) button on  
the connected equipment to cancel  
the playback pause status.  
Recording from  
Connected Equipment  
The connected equipment starts  
playback and the playback image is  
recorded by this recorder.  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
To stop recording, press x REC STOP  
on this recorder.  
You can record from a connected VCR or  
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar  
If you connect a DV camcorder with a DV  
IN jack  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
If you select DVD, insert a recordable  
page 38).  
If you connect an HDD camcorder with a  
USB jack  
2 Press INPUT to select an input source  
according to the connection you  
made.  
b Notes  
• When recording a video game image, the screen  
may not be clear.  
The front panel display changes as  
follows:  
• Any programme that contains a Copy-Never  
copy guard signal cannot be recorded.  
• When “Bilingual Recording” is set to “A/L” or  
“B/R” in step 3, you cannot select the sound  
when playing in the following cases.  
– When recording to the HDD (“HDD  
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode Off”  
in the “Recording” setup (page 137))/  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) in PCM mode.  
– When recording to the HDD (“HDD  
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode On”  
in the “Recording” setup (page 137))/  
DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R  
(Video mode).  
programme position  
3 Select the desired audio signal when  
recording a bilingual programme to  
the HDD or DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode).  
Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and  
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/  
R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 132).  
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select  
• You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In”  
is set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup  
the recording mode.  
For details about the recording mode,  
see page 154.  
5 Insert the source tape into the  
connected equipment and set to  
playback pause.  
6 Press z REC.  
This recorder starts recording.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue  
broadcasting/in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)  
Viewing the GUIDE Plus+  
Display  
Red button  
Green button  
Blue button  
Yellow button  
®
The GUIDE Plus+ system is a free  
GUIDE  
interactive programme guide. It displays up  
to seven days of programme listings,  
including programme titles, promotions, and  
broadcast information. GUIDE Plus+ data  
for the television programme listings are  
carried by your local broadcast host channel  
and are received through your aerial, set top  
box receiver, or direct cable connection from  
the wall.  
INFO  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
PAGE –  
DAY –  
PAGE +  
DAY +  
Press GUIDE.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen”  
appears.  
Visit www.europe.guideplus.com for a list  
of all European host channels.  
These are just a few of the ways to use the  
GUIDE Plus+ system.  
– Search for programmes by listing them  
according to category (such as Movies or  
Sport) or by using the Keyword Search  
function (page 67).  
– Once you have found the programme you  
are looking for, use the GUIDE Plus+  
system to set the timer for recording  
– You can set the system to display your  
favourite programmes according to  
conditions that you set, such as category  
and keyword (page 63).  
A Video Window: This shows the  
programme you were watching when  
you pressed GUIDE.  
B Action Bar: When the same colour  
button on the remote is pressed, the  
Action Bar functions. The Action Bar  
function differs according to the  
screen.  
b Note  
The GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used when  
“Input Line System” is set to “NTSC” in the  
“Basic” setup (page 125).  
C Information Box: Shows information  
about the selected programme when  
the “Home Screen” is displayed.  
Contents will differ according to the  
displayed screen.  
,continued  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
D Menu Bar: Press the blue button  
(“Home”), and press M to move the  
cursor to the Menu Bar. Then select  
one of the following features using  
</,, and press ENTER.  
Available buttons in the GUIDE Plus+  
system “Home Screen”  
Buttons  
Operations  
Blue button  
(“Home”)  
Returns to the “Home”  
position on the “Grid.”  
“Grid”: Shows the programmes for  
the current time slot and next 7 days.  
“Search”: Allows you to search for  
titles by category or by keyword  
(page 67). The displayed category  
depends upon the programme data  
received by this recorder. Movies,  
Sport, and Children are examples of  
possible categories.  
GUIDE  
PAGE +/–  
DAY +/–  
INFO  
Closes the GUIDE Plus+  
system.  
Changes the programme list  
by page.  
Changes the programme list  
by day.  
Showsinformation aboutthe  
selected programme.  
“My TV”: Sets the profile for your  
favourite programmes (page 63).  
“Schedule”: Displays the list of timer  
settings (page 71).  
“Info”: Shows information when  
available.  
“Editor”: Allows you to edit the  
channel lineup and channel display  
“Setup”: Allows you to change the  
language, country/region, postal code,  
input source, or host channel.  
To unlock the Video Window  
The Video Window is locked so that it does  
not change programme positions when you  
move the cursor across other titles.  
From “Grid,” select the logo of the  
programme position that is locked, and press  
the red button (“Unlock”). “ ” changes to  
” and the Video Window is unlocked. To  
lock the Video Window, select the logo of  
the programme position you want to lock  
and press the red button (“Lock”).  
b Notes  
• The Video Window is locked during recording  
and the lock indicator appears in the Video  
Window. You cannot unlock the Video Window  
while recording.  
E “Home” position: When you press the  
blue button (“Home”), the cursor  
returns to the last programme position  
on the “Grid.”  
• If you are watching programmes through a set  
top box receiver, the Video Window may not  
change as fast as you move the cursor. In this  
case, lock the Video Window (page 62).  
F Tiles: Shows the programme titles and  
category; green (sports), purple  
(movies), blue (children’s), teal  
(others).  
Select a programme using </M/m/  
,, and press ENTER to watch the  
programme.  
G Broadcast station Logo: Shows the  
broadcast station logo.  
H Time Slot: Indicates the currently  
selected time slot. Use </, to  
select a different time slot.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
5 Select “Channels,” “Categories,” or  
“Keywords,” and press the yellow  
button (“Add”).  
Listing Up Your  
Favourite Programme  
Information (My TV)  
“Channels”: Select the programme  
position using </M/m/,, and press  
ENTER. To add more programme  
positions, press the yellow button  
(“Add”). You can register up to 16  
programme positions.  
You can set a profile and list up only your  
favourite programme information.  
To cancel the registration, select a  
programme position, and press the red  
button (“Delete”).  
“Categories”: Select the category using  
</M/m/,, and press ENTER. To add  
more categories, press the yellow button  
(“Add”). You can register up to 4  
categories.  
1 Press GUIDE.  
2 Press M to move the cursor to the  
Menu Bar.  
3 Select “My TV” using </,.  
To cancel the registration, select a  
category, and press the red button  
(“Delete”).  
“Keywords”: Enter a keyword. See “To  
page 67. To add more keywords, press  
the yellow button (“Add”). You can  
register up to 16 keywords.  
“My TV”  
4 Press the yellow button (“Profile”).  
To cancel the registration, select a  
keyword, and press the red button  
(“Delete”).  
6 Press ENTER.  
To change the profile settings  
Repeat from step 3 above.  
To select and watch a programme from  
“My TV”  
1
After step 3 above, press ENTER.  
The programmes that match the profile  
conditions are displayed.  
2
Select a programme using </M/m/,,  
and press ENTER.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7 Wait for one day until the programme  
guide data can be received.  
Making Changes to the  
GUIDE Plus+ System  
If the programme guide data has not  
been received after waiting for a day,  
search for the host channel at the  
following website and set the host  
channel manually (“Changing the  
You can customize the GUIDE Plus+  
system. If the host channel has been changed  
or moved, and the programme guide data  
cannot be received, you can resolve the  
problem by following the steps below.  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host  
channel manually (Setup)  
Searching for the GUIDE Plus+  
host channel (Setup)  
If the set top box receiver is connected to the  
recorder using a SCART cord only and you  
want to receive the programme guide data  
from your set top box receiver, search for the  
host channel on the following website and  
set it for your area, following the steps  
below:  
The default host channel setting is set to  
“Automatic,” so you should not have to  
change the host channel setting. However, if  
the host channel has changed or moved,  
update the host channel setting.  
If the set top box receiver is connected to the  
recorder using a SCART cord only  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
1 After step 4 of “Searching for the  
press the yellow button (“Change”)  
twice.  
1 Press GUIDE.  
2 Press M to move the cursor to the  
Menu Bar.  
“Manual” appears.  
3 Select “Setup” using </,.  
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.  
“Setup”  
4 Select “Host Channel Setup” using  
M/m, and press ENTER.  
2 Select “Source” using ,.  
5 Press the yellow button (“Reset”).  
3 Press the yellow button (“Source”)  
6 Press [/1 to turn off the recorder.  
repeatedly to select the input source.  
4 Select “Prog. No.” using ,.  
5 Enter the programme position  
number using the number buttons.  
6 Press the green button (“Save”).  
The display asks for confirmation.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
7 Select “Confirm” using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
6 Select the programme position you  
want to check using M/m.  
The display returns to the GUIDE Plus+  
setup menu.  
To change the input source, press the red  
button (“Source”).  
To change the programme position,  
press the green button (“Prog. No.”),  
then enter a programme position number  
using the number buttons, and press  
ENTER.  
8 Wait one day until the programme  
guide data can be received.  
To cancel the settings  
Press the red button (“Back”).  
z Hint  
To check the GUIDE Plus+ system  
information  
To receive from the recorder a programme  
position that can be received by either the set top  
box receiver or the recorder, change the input  
source in step 6.  
1
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar, and  
press ENTER.  
2
Select “GUIDE Plus+ system  
Information” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Disabling programme  
positions (Editor)  
b Note  
If any programme positions are unused or  
contain unwanted channels, you can hide  
them.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system is reset when you make  
changes to the host channel settings.  
column, select the programme  
position you want to hide or display  
using M/m.  
Checking programme  
positions (Editor)  
Check whether programme position  
numbers are the same as the programme  
position numbers set in the “Analog Tuner”  
setup.  
If you want to make adjustments to the  
channel settings or change the channel  
2 Press the red button (“On/Off”).  
The disabled positions will turn grey.  
To show the disabled positions, press  
the red button (“On/Off”) again.  
b Notes  
1 Press GUIDE.  
• You cannot record a programme position if it is  
Tuner)” (page 127) even if it is set to “On” in the  
“Editor” in the Menu Bar.  
2 Press M to move the cursor to the  
Menu Bar.  
• If you are using your set top box receiver to  
receive programmes (when the set top box  
receiver is connected to the recorder using a  
SCART cord only, page 20) and are able to  
receive the same programme with both the set  
top box receiver and the recorder, change the  
“Source” to receive the programme with the  
recorder’s tuner.  
3 Select “Editor” using </,.  
“Editor”  
4 Press ENTER.  
5 Press , to move the cursor to the  
right column.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recording (For analogue  
broadcasting)  
Timer Recording (GUIDE  
Plus+/Manual)  
Red button  
Green button  
Yellow button  
GUIDE  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
TIMER  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
You can set the timer for a total of 32  
programmes (8 programmes when using the  
VPS/PDC function), up to 30 days in  
advance.  
Methods to set the timer include:  
• One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+  
system)  
z REC  
x REC  
STOP  
• Setting the timer manually (GUIDE Plus+  
system)  
Before you start recording…  
One Button Recording (GUIDE  
Plus+ (in areas with GUIDE  
Plus+ service only))  
• Check that the disc has enough available  
space for the recording (page 43). For the  
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you  
can free up disc space by erasing titles  
You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system to set  
the timer to record a programme up to seven  
days in advance.  
• Adjust the recording picture quality if  
necessary (page 120).  
• Turn on the set top box receiver and  
connect the set top box controller, when  
the recorder is connected to a set top box  
receiver and you want to record using the  
GUIDE Plus+ system.  
1 Press GUIDE.  
b Note  
Do not operate your set top box receiver just  
before or during a timer recording. This may  
prevent the accurate recording of a programme.  
2 Select a programme using </M/m/  
,.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4
Press the yellow button (“Add”).  
The display for entering characters  
appears.  
3 Press the red button (“Record”) or  
z REC.  
The set programme and Time Slot  
change colour and the recorder is ready  
to start recording. When recording from  
a set top box receiver, be sure to turn it  
on.  
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn  
off the recorder before the timer  
recording starts.  
To search for a programme by category  
1
Press M to move the cursor to the Menu  
Bar while the GUIDE Plus+ system  
“Home Screen” is displayed.  
5
Select a character on the keyboard using  
</M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
To switch between upper-case, lower-  
case, or characters with accents, press  
the yellow button (“Keyboard”)  
repeatedly.  
2
Select “Search” using </,, and press  
ENTER.  
To cancel entering a new keyword, press  
the red button (“Back”).  
6
7
Repeat step 5 to enter the keyword.  
Press the green button (“Save”).  
The entered keyword is registered.  
To delete the keyword, select the  
keyword you want to delete, and press  
the red button (“Delete”).  
To change the keyword, select the  
keyword you want to change, and press  
the green button (“Edit”).  
“Search”  
3
4
Select a category using </,.  
Select a sub-category using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Programmes that meet the conditions  
are listed.  
The sub-categories differ according to  
country/region.  
8
9
Select a keyword using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Programmes that contain the keyword in  
the programme’s title and in the  
programme’s Information Box are  
listed.  
5
Select a programme using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
To search for a programme by keyword  
1
Press M to move the cursor to the Menu  
Bar while the GUIDE Plus+ system  
“Home Screen” is displayed.  
Select a programme using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
z Hint  
2
3
Select “Search” using </,, and press  
When two or more keywords are set for “My  
Choice,” you can select “All” for sub-category.  
ENTER.  
Select “My Choice” using </,.  
When you have already entered  
keywords, go to step 8.  
To select a programme position quickly  
using the TV broadcast station logo  
To enter a new keyword, go to step 4.  
1
Press the yellow button (“Channels”)  
while the GUIDE Plus+ system “Home  
Screen” is displayed.  
,continued  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
3
Select the TV broadcast station logo  
using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.  
The display returns to “Grid” and the  
programme currently being broadcast  
by the selected TV station is selected.  
Setting the timer manually  
(Schedule)  
1 Press TIMER.  
Select a programme using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
The schedule list appears.  
2 Press the green button (“Manual”).  
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer  
recording  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
3 Set the yellow-highlighted date using  
the number buttons and </M/m/,.  
Then press the green button  
(“Next”).  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
If there is not enough available disc space for  
the recording, the recorder automatically  
adjusts the recording mode to enable the  
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.  
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”  
setup (page 135).  
z Hint  
Date  
When you select “AUTO” for the recording mode,  
the recorder automatically maximises the  
recording quality for the space available on the  
inserted disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to  
a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD).  
4 Set the start time using the number  
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press  
the green button (“Next”).  
5 Set the stop time using the number  
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press  
the green button (“Next”).  
b Notes  
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full  
appears on the screen, change the recording  
destination to “DVD,” or make available space  
for the recording (page 83).  
6 Select the input source using M/m,  
and select the programme position  
using the number buttons or M/m.  
• The last recording mode you selected manually  
becomes the default recording mode for timer  
recordings made from the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
• You cannot adjust the recording quality (HDD or  
DVD) once the recording starts.  
• The beginning of some recordings may not be  
made when using the VPS/PDC function.  
• You cannot extend the recording duration time  
when “VPS/PDC” is selected (page 69).  
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works  
with a timer recording to DVD, and the VPS/  
PDC function set to off.  
7 Press the green button (“Next”).  
The display for entering characters  
appears. You can change the title name,  
if necessary.  
8 Press the green button (“Save”).  
The date, start and stop times,  
programme position, etc. settings  
appear.  
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”  
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
z Hint  
9 Press the corresponding colour  
button repeatedly to set the recording  
quality, frequency, or destination.  
• Yellow button (“Destination”): Sets  
the recording destination. If there is  
not enough available DVD disc space  
for the recording, the recorder  
You can use the “Rec. Mode Adjust” function  
b Notes  
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full  
appears on the screen, change the recording  
destination to “DVD,” or make available space  
for the recording (page 83).  
automatically records the programme  
to the HDD even if you select “DVD”  
(Recovery Recording). When you set a  
daily or weekly timer, “HDDr” allows  
you to replace the previous timer  
recording with the new one  
automatically (HDD only).  
• Green button (“Frequency”): Selects  
the recording pattern.  
• When you set the recording destination to  
“HDDr,” the previous timer recording will be  
replaced with the new one even if you have not  
watched it.  
About the VPS/PDC function  
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV  
programmes in some broadcast systems.  
These signals ensure that timer recordings  
are made regardless of any broadcast delays,  
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.  
• Red button (“Quality”): Selects the  
recording mode (page 154).  
10 Press , to display “Timing,” then  
press the corresponding colour  
button repeatedly to set the duration  
or genre.  
To use the VPS/PDC function  
Select “VPS / PDC” in step 10 above.  
When you turn on this function, the recorder  
starts scanning the channels before the timer  
recording starts.  
• Green button (“Timing”): Selects the  
duration time or to set the VPS/PDC  
function” below.  
• Yellow button (“Genre”): Selects a  
particular HDD genre, if necessary.  
b Note  
If a message indicating that the HDD is full  
appears on the screen, change the recording  
destination to “DVD,” or make available space for  
the recording (page 83).  
11 Press GUIDE to exit the GUIDE Plus+  
system.  
Using the Quick Timer function  
The recorder is ready to start recording.  
• To modify the timer setting such as the  
VPS/PDC function, see page 71.  
You can set the recorder to record in 30-  
minute increments.  
For details, see page 58.  
To stop recording during timer recording  
Press x REC STOP.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
,continued  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Recording stereo and bilingual  
programmes  
Creating chapters in a title  
The recorder can automatically divide a  
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting  
chapter marks. To select chapter mark  
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto  
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter  
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/  
+RW)” in the “Recording” setup (page 136).  
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR  
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can  
edit chapter marks (page 85).  
The recorder automatically receives and  
records stereo and bilingual programmes  
based on the ZWEITON system or the  
NICAM system.  
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format”  
is set to “Video Mode Off” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 137)) and a DVD-  
RW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) can  
record both main and sub sounds. You can  
switch between main and sub when playing  
the disc.  
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format”  
is set to “Video Mode On” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 137)) and a  
DVD+RW, DVD+R, DVD-RW (Video  
mode), or DVD-R (Video mode) can record  
only one sound track (main or sub) at a time.  
Before recording starts, set “Bilingual  
Recording” to “A/L” (default) or “B/R” in  
the “Audio In” setup (page 132).  
About HDD Recording format, see  
page 137.  
ZWEITON (German stereo) system  
When a stereo-based programme is  
received, “Stereo” appears.  
When a bilingual ZWEITON-based  
programme is received, “L,” “R,” or “L+R”  
appears.  
NICAM system  
To record a NICAM programme, be sure to  
set “NICAM Select” to “NICAM” (default)  
in the “Audio In” setup. If the sound is not  
clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts,  
set “NICAM Select” to “Standard”  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 In the left column, select an item  
using the red button (“Back”) or the  
green button (“Next”), and adjust  
using the number buttons or </M/m/  
,.  
Checking/Changing/  
Cancelling Timer  
Settings (Schedule)  
5 Press the corresponding colour  
button repeatedly to change settings.  
• To change the recording destination,  
press the yellow button  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
You can change or cancel timer settings  
using the schedule list.  
(“Destination”). If there is not enough  
available DVD disc space for the  
recording, the recorder automatically  
records the programme to the HDD  
even if you select “DVD” (Recovery  
Recording). When you set a daily or  
weekly timer, “HDDr” allows you to  
replace the previous timer recording  
with the new one automatically (HDD  
only).  
Checking/changing timer  
settings  
1 Press TIMER.  
The schedule list appears.  
• To set the recording pattern, press the  
green button (“Frequency”).  
• To change the recording mode, press  
the red button (“Quality”) (page 154).  
6 Press , to display “Timing.”  
7 Press the green button (“Timing”)  
repeatedly to change the duration  
time or to set the VPS/PDC function.  
2 Select the timer setting you want to  
change using m.  
• If you want to record to a particular  
HDD genre, press the yellow button  
(“Genre”) repeatedly.  
You can check the selected timer setting  
highlighted in pink.  
To change the setting, go to step 3.  
If not changing the setting, go to step 6.  
8 Press GUIDE to exit the GUIDE Plus+  
system.  
The new settings become effective.  
3 Press the green button (“Edit”).  
Cancelling timer settings  
settings,” select the timer setting you  
want to cancel using M/m, and press the  
red button (“Delete”).  
To close the schedule list  
Press GUIDE.  
,continued  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
When the timer settings overlap  
• The programme that starts first has priority  
and the entire programme is recorded.  
• After finishing the previous recording, the  
other recording starts with several tens-of-  
second’s delay (when the end-time of one  
recording and the start-time of another are  
the same).  
Recording from  
Connected Equipment  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
You can record from a connected VCR or  
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar  
Device” on page 34.  
• When the recordings start at the same time,  
only one of them will be recorded. Cancel  
the timer setting for the programme that  
you are not going to record.  
For details, see page 60.  
b Note  
When “VPS / PDC” is set for one or more timer  
recordings, the start times may change in the event  
of a broadcast delay or early start.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Select a title using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Playback  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
Playing  
z Hint  
You can also use the H button in step 3 to start  
playback.  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD CD  
b Note  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
When any video titles are recorded on a DATA  
DVD, the MP3 audio tracks on that DATA DVD  
cannot be played.  
HDD  
DVD  
To use the DVD’s Menu  
When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a  
finalised DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video  
mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode),  
you can display the disc’s menu by pressing  
TOP MENU or MENU.  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
TITLE LIST  
b Note  
The H button is not available in the disc’s menu.  
</M/m/,,  
ENTER  
To play VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs with  
PBC functions  
/
.
>
PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play  
VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs  
interactively using the menu on your TV  
screen.  
When you start playing a VIDEO CD/Super  
VIDEO CD with PBC functions, the menu  
appears.  
Select an item using the number buttons, and  
press ENTER. Then, follow the instructions  
in the menu (press H when “Press  
SELECT” appears).  
H/X/x  
PLAY  
MODE  
1 Press HDD or DVD.  
• If you select DVD, insert a disc (see  
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO  
CD, DATA DVD or DATA CD, press  
H. Playback starts.  
b Note  
Some playback options such as search, repeat play  
or programme play cannot be played with PBC  
function. To play with playback options, start  
playback without PBC functions using the Title  
List.  
2 Press TITLE LIST.  
If the Title List is already displayed, skip  
this step.  
Example: HDD  
,continued  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
To play DivX video files or audio tracks in  
a disc containing both file types  
To play restricted DVDs (Parental Lock)  
If you play a restricted DVD, the display for  
entering your password appears on your TV  
screen.  
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts playback.  
1
2
3
4
Press < while the Title List (DVD/CD)  
is displayed.  
Select “Data Format” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
Select “CD,” “MP3” or “DivX” using  
M/m, and press ENTER.  
To register or change the password, see  
page 138.  
Return to the Title List, then select an  
album, title or track, and press ENTER  
or H.  
One-Touch Play (for SCART/HDMI  
connections only)  
Press H. With one touch of the H button,  
the recorder and your TV automatically turn  
on and the TV’s input is switched to the  
recorder. Playback starts automatically.  
To stop playback  
Press x.  
To resume playback from the point where  
you stopped (Resume Play)  
When you press H again after you stop  
playback, the recorder resumes playback  
from the point where you pressed x.  
b Notes  
• When using the HDMI connection, there may be  
a delay, before the playback picture appears on  
the TV screen, and the beginning portion of the  
playback picture may not be displayed.  
• To use the One-Touch Play function, set  
“Control for HDMI” to “On” (default) in the  
“HDMI Output” setup (page 140).  
To start from the beginning, press x again,  
and press H. Playback starts from the  
beginning of the title/track/scene.  
b Notes  
• You cannot resume playback during TV Pause.  
• Resume Play is not available for Super VIDEO  
CDs.  
• The point where you stopped playing is cleared  
from memory when:  
– you open the disc tray (except HDD).  
– you play another title (except HDD).  
– you start playback using the Title List (except  
HDD).  
– you edit the title after stopping playback.  
– you change the settings on the recorder.  
– you make a recording (except HDD).  
– you disconnect the mains lead.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback options  
To check the position of the buttons below, see the illustration on page 73.  
Buttons  
Operations  
ANGLE  
Changes the angles for a scene when pressed during playback.  
When the disc has various angles (multi-angles) recorded,  
DVD  
” appears on the screen.  
To switch the angle mark indicator to off, set “Angle Indicator”  
to “Off” in the “Playback” setup (page 138).  
AUDIO  
Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed  
repeatedly in normal playback mode.  
-
-
RWVR  
RVR  
HDD  
*1  
*1  
: Selects the language.  
DVD DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
CD  
DVD VCD  
-
RWVR  
: Selects the main or sub sound.  
-
RVR  
HDD  
DATA DVD DATA CD  
*2  
*2  
: Selects stereo or  
VCD CD  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
monaural audio tracks.  
*1  
DivX video file only  
MP3 audio track only  
*2  
SUBTITLE  
Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly.  
*
*
DVD DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
* DivX video file only  
/
(instant replay/  
Each time you press  
duration.  
, replays the scene for the following  
instant advance)  
5 seconds t 15 seconds t 30 seconds t 1 minute t  
2 minutes t 3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t  
20 minutes t advances the time in 10-minute increments t  
2 hours  
-
+
RWVR  
RW  
HDD  
+
-
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
R
*
-
RVideo  
DVD DATA DVD  
*
DATA CD  
Each time you press  
, briefly fast forwards the current scene  
for the following duration.  
* DivX video file only  
30 seconds t 1 minute t 1 minute 30 seconds t 2 minutes  
t 3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t 20 minutes t  
advances the time in 10-minute increments t 2 hours  
. (previous)/  
> (next)  
Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/scene/  
track when pressed during playback.  
Goes to the beginning of the first title/track when pressed in stop  
mode.  
,continued  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Buttons  
Operations  
Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during  
playback.  
(fast reverse/fast forward)  
Search speed changes as follows:  
fast reverse fast forward  
*1  
*2  
mFR1  
T
t MFF1  
mFR2 T T t t MFF2  
mFR3 T T T t t t MFF3  
mFR4 T T T T t t t t MFF4  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse  
continues at the selected speed until you release the button.  
*1  
When you press m once during playback, you can play Reverse  
play (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/DivX  
video files/audio tracks).  
When you press M once during playback, you can play quickly  
*2  
with sound (Scan Audio) (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super  
VIDEO CDs).  
Not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/audio tracks.  
*3  
To resume normal playback, press H.  
Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in  
pause mode.  
(slow, freeze frame)  
Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode.  
To resume normal playback, press H.  
-
+
RWVR  
RW  
HDD  
+
-
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
R
*1  
-
RVideo  
VCD  
DVD  
*1*2  
*1*2  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
*1  
Playback direction only  
DivX video file only  
*2  
X (pause)  
Pauses playback.  
To resume normal playback, press H.  
b Notes  
Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a  
CD  
• Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with  
titles recorded on this recorder.  
• When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive  
noise will be heard from the LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/  
DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks.  
To avoid possible damage to the audio system,  
the user should take proper precautions when the  
LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/DECODER/LINE 2 OUT  
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks of the recorder are  
connected to an amplification system. To enjoy  
DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external  
DTS decoder must be connected to the  
DIGITAL OUT jack of the recorder.  
• Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO  
button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD  
• JPEG image files made with a DVD camcorder  
can only be played as a slideshow. For video  
files containing JPEG image files and movies,  
the recorder can play movie parts only.  
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound  
track  
DTS audio signals are output only through the  
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.  
When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set  
“DTS Output” to “On” in the “Audio Out” setup  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing a specific portion  
repeatedly (A-B Repeat)  
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)  
You can repeatedly play all the titles/tracks/  
files or a single title/chapter/track on the  
HDD, a disc or an album.  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
For audio tracks on a CD, press ,  
while the Title List is displayed, and  
select “Play Mode.”  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
For audio tracks on a DATA DVD/  
DATA CD/CD, press , while the Title  
List is displayed, and select “Play  
Mode.”  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
2 Select “A-B Repeat,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
“Set point A” is selected.  
2 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.  
3 Select an item to be repeated using  
M/m.  
“Repeat Title” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA  
*1  
*1  
DVDs /DATA CDs ): repeats the  
current title.  
“Repeat Chapter” (for HDD/DVDs):  
repeats the current chapter.  
*2  
“Repeat Track” (for VIDEO CDs  
CDs/DATA DVDs/DATA CDs):  
repeats the current track.  
/
3 While monitoring the sound, press  
ENTER at the starting point (point A)  
of the portion to be played  
repeatedly.  
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the  
current programme (page 78).  
“Repeat Disc” (for VIDEO CDs  
“Set point B” is selected.  
*2  
/
4 Continue playing to locate the ending  
point (point B), and press ENTER.  
A-B Repeat starts.  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)/CDs/  
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs): repeats the  
entire disc.  
“Repeat Album” (for DATA DVDs  
*3  
/
*3  
DATA CDs ): repeats the current  
album.  
To cancel A-B Repeat  
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to  
“Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
*1  
DivX video file only  
Available only when playing without PBC  
functions  
*2  
*3  
Audio tracks only  
b Notes  
• When playing an HDD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW  
(Video mode)/DVD-R (Video mode), set the  
start and stop points within the same title.  
• “A-B Repeat” is not available for MP3 audio  
tracks.  
4 Press ENTER.  
Repeat play starts.  
To cancel Repeat play  
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat  
Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
b Note  
You can select “Repeat Programme” only during  
Programme play.  
,continued  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
6 To programme other chapters or  
tracks, press </M/m/, to select a  
step number, and repeat steps 4 and  
5.  
Creating your own programme  
(Programme)  
*1  
*1  
-
*2  
-
*2  
RVideo  
HDD RWVideo  
VCD CD  
7 Press H.  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
Programme play starts.  
*1  
finalised disc only  
MP3 audio tracks only  
*2  
To stop Programme play  
You can play the contents of the HDD or a  
disc in the order you want by arranging the  
order of the titles/chapters/albums/tracks on  
the HDD or disc to create your own  
programme. You can make a programme of  
up to 24 chapters/tracks, etc.  
Press x (stop).  
To cancel Programme play  
Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set  
“Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play”  
in the “Play Mode” menu.  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
For audio tracks on a DATA DVD/  
DATA CD/CD, press , while the Title  
List is displayed, and select “Play  
Mode.”  
To erase the programme  
Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set  
“Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in  
the “Play Mode” menu.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
z Hints  
• The programme you made remains after  
Programme play finishes. To play the same  
programme again, set “Programme” to “Start  
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
However, the programme is cleared after you  
remove the disc or press [/1.  
2 Select “Programme,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and  
press ENTER.  
The “Input/Edit Programme” display  
differs depending upon the disc type.  
Example: DVD  
• You can repeat Programme play. During  
Programme play, set “Repeat” to “Repeat  
Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu  
4 Select a title or album (example: Title  
01) using M/m, and press ,.  
5 Select a chapter or track (example:  
Chapter 001) using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
The chapter or track is programmed.  
If you make a mistake, select the step  
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,  
and press CLEAR.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
b Notes  
• The picture does not pause and the recorder  
starts only recording in the following cases.  
– when the programme positions are preset  
differently between the recorder and the  
connected TV.  
Advanced Playback  
Functions  
– when watching the programme from the  
external equipment connected to your TV.  
• The picture tuned by the recorder pauses when  
“TV Pause” is set to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 142).  
• You may not be able to use the “TV Pause”  
function depending on some TVs. For details,  
refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
your TV.  
• The “TV Pause” function will not work correctly  
when watching TV via the connected component  
such as a VCR or digital tuner. The “TV Pause”  
function works only with the channel selected on  
the TV.  
• You cannot use the “TV Pause” function as a  
recording feature from the component (VCR,  
etc.) connected to the LINE 1/DECODER jack.  
• The “TV Pause” function will not work if the  
connected TV does not comply with  
SMARTLINK. To check whether your TV  
complies with SMARTLINK, refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with your TV.  
Pausing a TV broadcast (TV  
Pause/Pause Live TV)  
HDD  
You can pause a current TV broadcast, and  
record it on the HDD, then continue  
watching the programme at a later time. This  
is useful when you receive an unexpected  
phone call or visitor while watching TV.  
When connecting the recorder to your TV  
using the SCART jack, do the following.  
– set “SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder  
Only” in the “Options” setup (page 141).  
– set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 142).  
– preset programme positions by  
downloading from your TV using  
“Download from TV” of “Auto Channel  
Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup  
If you do not make the SCART connection,  
set “TV Pause” to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 142).  
Playing from the beginning of  
the programme you are  
recording (Chase Play)  
1 While viewing a TV broadcast, press  
TV PAUSE.  
HDD  
“Chase Play” allows you to view the  
The picture pauses, and the recorder  
starts recording the current TV channel  
to the HDD.  
It may take up to 10 seconds to start  
recording.  
recorded part of a programme on the HDD  
while the recording is being made. You do  
not need to wait until the recording finishes.  
Press H while recording.  
2 Press H to resume watching the  
Playback starts from the beginning of the  
programme you are recording.  
When you fast forward to the point that you  
are recording, “Chase Play” returns to  
normal playback.  
programme.  
You can fast forward/fast reverse,  
pause, or stop the programme using  
m/M, X and x without affecting  
the recording.  
3 Press x REC STOP to stop recording.  
,continued  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playing a previous recording  
while making another  
(Simultaneous Rec and Play)  
Searching for a Time/  
Title/Chapter/Track,  
etc.  
+
RW  
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RWVR RWVideo  
-
-
RVR  
RVideo  
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
*
DATA CD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
*
“Simultaneous Rec and Play” allows you to  
view a previously recorded programme  
while recording programmes. Playback  
continues even if a timer recording starts.  
Use this function as follows:  
DATA CD  
* DivX video file only  
You can search a disc by title, chapter, scene  
or track. As titles and tracks are assigned  
individual numbers, select the title or track  
by entering its number. You can also search  
for a scene using the time code.  
• While recording to the HDD:  
Play another title on the HDD.  
Play a previously recorded programme on  
a DVD by pressing the DVD button.  
• While recording to a DVD:  
Play a previously recorded programme on  
the HDD by pressing the HDD button.  
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
You can also play a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO  
CD, Super VIDEO CD, DATA DVD, or  
DATA CD while recording on the HDD.  
3 Select a search method, and press  
ENTER.  
Example: Play another title on the HDD  
while recording to the HDD.  
“Time Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA  
*1  
*1  
DVDs /DATA CDs /VIDEO  
*2*3  
CDs  
): Searches for a starting point  
1
While recording, press TITLE LIST to  
display the HDD Title List.  
by entering the time code.  
“Title Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA  
*1  
*1  
2
Select the title you want to play, and  
press ENTER.  
DVDs /DATA CDs  
)
“Chapter Search” (for HDD/DVDs)  
*3  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
“Track Search” (for VIDEO CDs  
)
*1  
DivX video file only  
Except Super VIDEO CDs  
*2  
Example: Play a DVD while recording to  
the HDD.  
*3  
Available only when playing without PBC  
functions  
1
2
3
While recording, press DVD and insert  
the DVD into the recorder.  
The display for entering the number  
appears.  
Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD  
Title List.  
4 Press the number buttons to select  
the number of the title, chapter, time  
code, etc., you want.  
Select the title you want to play, and  
press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected title.  
For example: Time Search  
To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes,  
and 20 seconds, enter “21020.”  
If you make a mistake, select another  
number.  
b Note  
You cannot play a DVD, DivX video or VIDEO  
CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while  
recording on the HDD in the PAL/SECAM colour  
system.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5 Press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected  
number.  
z Hint  
You can search for a title/track/chapter by entering  
the title/track/chapter number using the number  
buttons during playback.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To switch between the Playlist and  
Original Title List (DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR  
mode only)  
Erasing and Editing  
You can display the Playlist titles in the Title  
List (Playlist), or the Original titles in the  
Title List (Original).  
Before Editing  
This recorder offers various edit options for  
various disc types.  
1
2
3
Press < while the Title List is  
displayed.  
Select “Play List” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
• You may lose the edited contents if you remove  
the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.  
• DVD discs created by DVD camcorders cannot  
be edited on this recorder.  
Select “Original” or “Play List” using  
M/m, and press ENTER.  
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s  
control information is full, erase or edit  
unnecessary titles.  
• The remaining disc space displayed on the  
screen may differ from the actual remaining disc  
space.  
• When editing a DVD+R or DVD-R, finish all  
editing before finalising the disc. You cannot  
edit a finalised disc.  
About editing accuracy  
When editing the titles recorded on the  
HDD, you can select the type of editing.  
“Video Mode Compatible Editing”:  
Recommended if you are going to dub the  
titles to DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode)  
or DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs afterward by High-  
speed dubbing. The editing points and  
chapter marks may be slightly different from  
those you selected.  
To open up disc space  
To open up disc space on a DVD+RW or  
DVD-RW (Video mode), erase the title with  
the largest number in the title list.  
“Frame Accurate Editing”:  
Recommended when you want to edit titles  
precisely. However, the editing points may  
be slightly different from the point you  
selected when you dub the titles by High-  
speed dubbing.  
Largest title number  
To open up disc space on the HDD or a  
DVD-RW (VR mode), you can erase any  
title.  
For DVD-Rs and DVD+Rs, the available  
disc space does not increase even if you  
erase titles.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
“Create”: Creates a Playlist (page 87).  
“Undo”: Undoes the last edit you made.  
Erasing and Editing a  
Title  
z Hint  
You can label or re-label DVDs (page 45).  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
Editing multiple titles (Multi-  
Mode)  
This section explains the basic edit  
functions. Note that editing is irreversible.  
To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)  
without changing the original recordings,  
create a Playlist title (page 87).  
HDD  
You can select and edit up to 24 titles at one  
time.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,  
switch the Title List (Original or  
Playlist), if necessary.  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
2 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
2 Select a title, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
You can make the following edits to the  
title.  
The display for selecting titles to be  
edited appears.  
“Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select  
“Yes” when asked for confirmation.  
“Edit”: Allows you to make the  
following edits.  
• “Title Name”: Allows you to enter or  
re-enter a title name (page 44).  
• “Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s  
thumbnail picture that appears in the  
Title List (page 42).  
4 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box.  
To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• “A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the  
title (page 84).  
• “Divide”: Divides a title into two titles  
• “Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters in a title  
• “Set Genre”: Assigns a genre to a title.  
5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the titles  
you want to edit.  
• “Protect”: Protects the title. “  
6 When you finish selecting titles,  
appears next to the protected title.  
• “Move”: Changes the title’s playing  
order (page 87).  
press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
7 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
• “Combine”: Combines two titles into  
one (page 87).  
“Erase”: Erases the selected titles.  
“Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a  
genre name (up to 12 characters)  
“Multi-Mode”: Allows you to select and  
edit multiple titles at one time (page 83).  
“Protect”: Protects the titles. “  
appears next to the protected title.  
“Unprotected”: Unprotects the titles.  
“Change Genre”: Changes the genre of  
the titles.  
,continued  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
z Hint  
To cancel “A-B Erase”  
Press O RETURN. The Title List appears.  
You can exit “Multi-Mode” by pressing , and  
selecting “Single-Mode” while selecting titles.  
z Hint  
A chapter mark is inserted after the scene is erased.  
The chapter mark divides the title into separate  
chapters on either side of the mark.  
Erasing a section of a title  
(A-B Erase)  
b Notes  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
• Images or sound may be momentarily  
interrupted at the point where you erase a section  
of a title.  
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be  
erased.  
You can select a section (scene) in a title and  
erase it. Note that erasing scenes in a title  
cannot be undone.  
1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Title,” select “Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
Dividing a title (Divide)  
*
*
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
2 Select “A-B Erase,” and press  
If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do  
not want to reduce the picture quality, divide  
the title into two shorter titles. Note that  
dividing a title cannot be undone.  
* Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode.  
ENTER.  
For the HDD, select a type of editing,  
and press ENTER. For details, see  
page 82.  
The display for setting point A appears.  
The title starts to play.  
1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Title,” select “Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
2 Select “Divide,” and press ENTER.  
For the HDD, select a type of editing,  
and press ENTER. For details, see  
page 82.  
The display for setting the dividing  
point appears.  
The title starts to play.  
3 Select point A using m/M or H,  
and press X.  
• To return to the beginning of the title,  
press X and then press ..  
4 Select “From,” and press ENTER.  
The position of point A is displayed.  
5 Press H.  
6 Select point B using m/M or H,  
and press X.  
3 Select the dividing point using m/  
M or H, and press X.  
7 Select “To,” and press ENTER.  
The position of point B is displayed.  
• To return to the beginning of the title,  
press X and then press ..  
8 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The scene is erased.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 Press ENTER.  
For the HDD, the display asks for  
confirmation.  
Erasing and Editing a  
Chapter  
5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER (HDD  
only).  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
HDD  
The title is divided into two.  
You can edit individual chapters within a  
title. To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode) without changing the original  
recordings, create a Playlist (page 87).  
1 Press TITLE LIST.  
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,  
switch the Title List (Original or  
Playlist), if necessary.  
2 Select a title containing the chapter  
you want to edit, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Chapter Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
For the HDD, select a type of editing,  
and press ENTER. For details, see  
page 82.  
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
You can make the following edits to the  
chapter.  
“Divide”: Divides a chapter into two  
“Erase/Move”  
• “Erase”: Erases the selected chapter  
• “Move” (for Playlist titles on DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode): Changes  
the chapter’s playing order (page 88).  
“Combine”: Combines two chapters  
into one (page 86).  
,continued  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dividing a chapter (Divide)  
Combining multiple chapters  
(Combine)  
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Chapter,” select “Divide.”  
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Chapter,” select “Combine.”  
2 Select a chapter using </,.  
2 Move the combining bar using </  
,, and press ENTER.  
3 Select the dividing point using m/  
M or H, and press X.  
• To return to the beginning of the  
chapter, press X and then press ..  
The two adjacent chapters of the  
combining bar are combined.  
4 Press ENTER.  
b Note  
Chapters cannot be combined if they are  
automatically created from an HDD camcorder  
dubbing.  
The chapter is divided into two.  
Erasing a chapter (Erase)  
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a  
Chapter,” select “Erase.”  
2 Select a chapter using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
3 (For a Playlist chapter only)  
Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
4 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The chapter is erased.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.  
Creating and Editing a  
Playlist  
-
-
RVR  
RWVR  
Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit  
without changing the actual recordings. You  
can create up to 99 Playlist titles.  
b Note  
5 Select a new location for the title  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
The title moves to the new location.  
• To move more titles, repeat from step  
2.  
Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the  
“Copy-Once” copy protection signal cannot be  
dubbed or moved (page 157).  
1 Press TITLE LIST, and switch to the  
Playlist.  
For details on switching to the Playlist,  
see page 82.  
Combining multiple Playlist  
titles (Combine)  
2 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
1 Press TITLE LIST, and switch to the  
Playlist.  
3 Select “Create,” and press ENTER.  
The original titles in the Title List  
appear.  
For details on switching to the Playlist,  
see page 82.  
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.  
4 Select an original title to add to the  
The sub-menu appears.  
Playlist, and press ENTER.  
The selected title is added to the Playlist.  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select all of  
the titles you want to add to the  
Playlist.  
4 Select “Combine,” and press ENTER.  
Moving a Playlist title (Move)  
1 Press TITLE LIST, and switch to the  
Playlist.  
For details on switching to the Playlist,  
see page 82.  
5 Select a title you want to combine,  
and press ENTER.  
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The titles are combined.  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
Dividing a Playlist title (Divide)  
You can divide a Playlist title. For  
instructions, see page 84.  
,continued  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Moving a chapter (Move)  
1 Press TITLE LIST, and switch to the  
Playlist.  
For details on switching to the Playlist,  
see page 82.  
2 Select a Playlist title containing the  
chapter you want to edit, and press  
,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “Chapter Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
5 Select “Erase/Move.”  
6 Select a chapter using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
7 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.  
8 Select a new location for the chapter  
using </,, and press ENTER.  
The chapter moves to the new location.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• The “Set Thumbnail” setting in the  
dubbing source is dubbed as a thumbnail  
picture marker (except when dubbing from  
a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/  
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)). The  
position of thumbnail picture markers may  
be slightly changed from the original.  
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)  
Before Dubbing  
In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying  
a recorded title on the internal hard disk  
drive (HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.”  
You can dub a playing title using the HDD/  
DVD DUB button (see “HDD/DVD  
Dubbing” on page 90) or you can select to  
dub multiple titles all at once (see “Dubbing  
also dub an entire DVD disc to make a  
z Hint  
When you dub a Playlist title, it is recorded as an  
Original title.  
b Notes  
• You cannot make a recording while dubbing.  
• Before playing a dubbed disc on other DVD  
equipment, finalise the disc (page 46, 91).  
• You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs to the  
HDD.  
• Titles containing mixed aspect ratios cannot be  
dubbed to a DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/  
DVD-R (Video mode) using the HDD/DVD  
DUB button.  
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be dubbed to single-  
layer DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.  
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes) 16:9  
size titles cannot be dubbed to a DVD+RW/  
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).  
• Titles recorded in Dolby Digital 5.1 ch audio are  
down-converted to 2-channel audio when  
dubbed at normal speed (“Real time” dubbing).  
• About the “Move” function, see page 157.  
Before you start, read the following  
precautions, which are common to all  
dubbing methods.  
Before you start…  
• You cannot record both the main and sub  
sound on the HDD (when “HDD  
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode  
On” in the “Recording” setup),  
DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video mode),  
DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode). For  
bilingual programmes, set “Bilingual  
Recording” to either “A/L” (default) or “B/  
R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 132).  
About HDD Recording format, see  
page 137.  
• A title name in the dubbing source is  
dubbed. However, only up to 40 characters  
of a title name are dubbed when dubbing  
from the HDD to a DVD+RW/DVD-RW  
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video  
mode).  
• The chapter marks in the dubbing source  
are dubbed. The position of chapter marks  
may be slightly changed from the original.  
However, the chapter marks in the dubbing  
source are not retained in the dubbed title  
when dubbing to a DVD-RW/DVD-R  
(Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD+R at  
normal speed. The chapter marks are  
automatically inserted according to the  
“Auto Chapter (Video)” and “Auto  
Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” settings in the  
“Recording” setup (page 136).  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
HDD/DVD Dubbing  
Dubbing Using Dubbing  
List  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
-
-
RVideo  
You can dub a single title by pressing the  
HDD/DVD DUB button during playback.  
You can also dub from finalised DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs (Video mode) to the HDD.  
RVR  
You can select the titles you want to dub  
using Dubbing List. You can also edit titles  
before dubbing without changing the  
original titles.  
1 Start playback of a title.  
For playing a title, see “Playing” on  
page 73.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Press HDD/DVD DUB.  
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts dubbing the current  
playing title from the beginning.  
The recorder turns off automatically  
when you do not use the recorder for  
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing  
has finished.  
3 Select a dubbing direction, and press  
ENTER.  
To dub titles from the HDD to a disc,  
select “HDD -> DVD.”  
To dub titles from a disc to the HDD,  
select “DVD/CD -> HDD.”  
4 Select “Create New Dubbing List,”  
To cancel dubbing  
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more  
than one second.  
and press ENTER.  
The Dubbing List appears.  
When dubbing is stopped partway, no part of  
the title will be moved to the dubbing target.  
However, note that this will decrease the free  
space for DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs.  
• If you have previously saved a  
Dubbing List and want to resume  
editing it, select “Use Previous  
Dubbing List,” and go to step 7.  
About dubbing mode  
Titles on the HDD are dubbed to a disc at  
high speed (“High-Speed” dubbing).  
Titles on a disc are dubbed to the HDD at  
normal speed (“Real time” dubbing).  
For the minimum required time for “High-  
Speed” dubbing, see page 157.  
To convert the recording mode (only  
when dubbing from a disc to the HDD)  
Before step 1, press REC MODE to select  
the recording mode.  
A Direction of dubbing  
B Total number of titles to be  
dubbed  
b Note  
You cannot use the HDD/DVD DUB button in the  
following cases. Dub the title using Dubbing List  
– When dubbing the title recorded in MN6 mode  
or longer duration mode to a DVD+RW/  
DVD+R.  
– When dubbing the title recorded in HQ+ mode to  
a DVD.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
C Dubbing step number  
Display 1: Select a title you want to  
dub (the “Select Titles” display).  
Display 2: Edit a title (the “Title  
Edit” display).  
9 Select an option using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
The options differ depending on the  
dubbing direction or disc type.  
“Recording Mode”: Changes the  
dubbing mode of all selected titles at a  
time using M/m (page 154).  
“Input Disc Name”: Changes the disc  
name (page 44).  
“Finalise”: Select “Yes” to finalise a  
disc automatically after dubbing (DVD-  
RW/DVD-R (Video mode), or  
DVD+R).  
Display 3: Confirm the settings and  
start dubbing (the “Start Dubbing”  
display).  
D Total size of the selected titles and  
available space on the disc to be  
dubbed (approximate)  
E Selected title’s thumbnail picture  
10 Select “Start Dubbing,” and press  
5 Select a title, and press ENTER.  
The selected title changes colour.  
When you select “HDD -> DVD” in step  
3, you can change the title order or  
search for a title by genre (see “3.  
ENTER.  
When you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step  
9, select the title menu style, and press  
ENTER.  
The recorder turns off automatically  
when you do not use the recorder for  
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing  
has finished.  
6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles  
in the order you want to dub.  
7 Select “Next” using ,, and press  
To cancel dubbing  
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more  
than one second.  
When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway,  
no part of the title will be moved to the  
dubbing target. However, note that this will  
decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-  
Rs.  
ENTER.  
The “Title Edit” display appears.  
For details about editing, see “To edit  
8 Select “Next” using ,, and press  
ENTER.  
The “Start Dubbing” display appears.  
About dubbing mode  
” appears next to the title that can be  
dubbed at high speed (“High-Speed”  
dubbing) in the “Title Edit” display. The  
following titles are dubbed at normal speed  
(“Real time” dubbing).  
– Titles containing both main and sub  
sounds (except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode)).  
– Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3  
and 16:9, etc.) (except for DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs (VR mode)).  
– Titles recorded on DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs  
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video  
mode).  
For the minimum required time for “High-  
Speed” dubbing, see page 157.  
,continued  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
b Notes  
To edit titles on the Dubbing List  
• The Dubbing List you created remains after  
dubbing. To edit the existing Dubbing List,  
select “Use Previous Dubbing List” in step 4.  
The Dubbing List is cleared when:  
– you change “Input Line System” setting in the  
“Basic” setup (page 125).  
1
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Dubbing Using  
Dubbing List” on page 90.  
The “Title Edit” display appears.  
– you reset the recorder (page 150).  
– you open the disc tray (except when dubbing  
from the HDD).  
– you edit the titles on a disc (except when  
dubbing from the HDD).  
– you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist  
(when dubbing from DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in  
VR mode only).  
– you finalise the disc.  
2
3
Select a title you want to edit, and press  
ENTER.  
The sub-menu appears.  
• The “seams” that are left over from editing may  
remain on the disc after dubbing to DVD+RWs/  
DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs  
(Video mode).  
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording  
starts, even if you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in  
step 9.  
Select an option, and press ENTER.  
The options differ depending on the  
dubbing direction or disc type.  
“Erase”: Erases the selected title.  
“Title Name”: Names or renames a title  
“A-B Erase”: Erases the section of the  
title (page 84).  
“Move”: Changes the order of titles  
“Preview”: Allows you to check the  
content of a title.  
“Divide”: Divides a title into two titles  
“Combine”: Combines two titles  
“Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters  
“Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s  
thumbnail frame that appears in the Title  
List (page 42).  
“Recording Mode”: Sets the picture  
quality of the dubbing.  
“Bilingual”: Sets how a bilingual audio  
programme is dubbed.  
“Cancel”: Exits the sub-menu.  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit all of the  
titles.  
Go to step 8 of “Dubbing Using  
Dubbing List” on page 90 to dub edited  
titles.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.  
The disc is automatically finalised.  
• To make another backup disc, replace  
discs, select “Start,” and press  
ENTER.  
Making a Backup Disc  
(DVD Backup)  
+
-
+
-
RVideo  
RWVideo  
RW  
R
10 Select “Yes” or “No,” and press  
ENTER.  
You can dub all of the contents on a finalised  
DVD+RW/DVD+R or finalised DVD-RW/  
DVD-R (Video mode) to another recordable  
DVD+RW/DVD-RW or unused DVD+R/  
DVD-R via the HDD as a backup copy.  
To erase the backup data on the HDD,  
select “Yes.”  
To make another backup disc later,  
select “No.”  
The recorder turns off automatically  
when you do not use the recorder for  
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing  
has finished.  
b Note  
Backup discs of unfinalised discs cannot be made.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
To display the dubbing information  
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
Press DISPLAY while dubbing.  
3 Select “DVD Backup,” and press  
To cancel DVD backup during dubbing  
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more  
than one second.  
ENTER.  
4 Select “Start new DVD Backup,” and  
press ENTER.  
To erase backup data on the HDD  
• If you have previously dubbed backup  
data to the HDD, select “Resume  
writing data,” and go to step 7.  
1
Select “Erase back-up data” in step 4,  
and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
5 Insert the DVD you are going to make  
a backup of.  
2
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts dubbing all of the  
contents on a DVD to the HDD.  
b Notes  
• When dubbing to a DVD+R/DVD-R is stopped  
partway in step 8, you cannot play or record on  
the disc. However, a DVD+RW/DVD-RW can  
be used again after it is reformatted.  
• You cannot make a backup disc of DVD+R DLs/  
DVD-R DLs.  
7 Press Z (open/close), and replace  
the DVD with a recordable DVD+RW/  
DVD-RW or an unused DVD+R/DVD-  
R.  
• You may not use the “DVD Backup” function  
depending on the recording quality or physical  
condition of the disc, or characteristics of the  
recording device and authoring software.  
To make a backup disc of DVD+RWs/  
DVD+Rs, insert a recordable  
DVD+RW or unused DVD+R.  
To make a backup disc of DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs, insert a recordable DVD-RW  
or unused DVD-R.  
8 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts “High-Speed”  
dubbing the contents that were dubbed  
to the HDD in step 6.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
b Notes  
• No timer recordings or other operations are  
available when dubbing from the HDD  
camcorder.  
HDD Camcorder Dubbing  
• The supported device is Sony HDD SD  
(standard definition) camcorder released in or  
before April 2008.  
• The recorder does not support the AVCHD  
format (HD (high definition) image quality).  
You can dub MPEG-2 format images (SD  
(standard definition) images) only.  
• When the HDD camcorder contains still images  
and moving images, only moving images can be  
dubbed to the recorder.  
• Playlist made with the HDD camcorder cannot  
be dubbed to the recorder.  
• You cannot set the recording mode for HDD  
camcorder dubbing.  
• When dubbing from the HDD camcorder, the  
recorder recognises and uses the shooting date  
and time information of the HDD camcorder. If  
the HDD camcorder’s clock is incorrect, the  
recorder may not dub the contents properly. Set  
the HDD camcorder’s clock correctly before  
shooting.  
Before HDD Camcorder  
Dubbing  
You can dub the contents of a Sony HDD  
camcorder to the hard disk drive of the  
recorder via the USB jack on the front panel.  
Methods to dub from the HDD camcorder  
include:  
• One-Touch Dubbing (Incremental  
Dubbing)  
• Dubbing using the on-screen display  
(Incremental Dubbing/Full Dubbing)  
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for  
HDD camcorder dubbing,” and then move  
on to the section on dubbing.  
z Hints  
• If you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks,  
page 72.  
• If you want to record the contents of the HDD  
camcorder on a DVD, dub them to the HDD of  
the recorder first, and then edit the title on the  
HDD and dub it to a DVD.  
• Parts finished dubbing remain on the recorder  
when the HDD space of the recorder becomes  
full or you stop dubbing partway.  
• Dolby Digital 5.1 ch audio recorded in the HDD  
camcorder can be dubbed to the recorder in the  
same format, without down-conversion.  
• Images of the HDD camcorder are not displayed  
when dubbing.  
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of  
the HDD camcorder memory onto the recorder.  
• If you dub the contents recorded in high quality  
mode in the HDD camcorder to the recorder, it  
may take longer to finish dubbing than the  
recording.  
• Set the recorder and HDD camcorder to the same  
colour system.  
How titles and chapters are created  
In each dubbing operation, the contents  
dubbed to the recorder are divided into titles  
by the shooting date. If the date has been  
changed to the next day during one shooting  
session, the shot image is included in the title  
of the date when the shooting session started.  
The title is divided into chapters. Each  
shooting session on the HDD camcorder  
becomes a chapter.  
z Hint  
The title names are automatically labelled as “USB  
*** (start time of the first shooting session).”  
b Note  
The dubbed contents are divided into titles in the  
following cases, even if they were all recorded in  
the same day:  
– When the total recording time exceeds 12 hours.  
– When the total number of scenes exceeds 99.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
b Notes  
• Connect the HDD camcorder directly to the  
recorder.  
Preparing for HDD camcorder  
dubbing  
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while dubbing.  
• When signal input to the USB jack (type A) on  
the front panel or recorder operation cannot be  
performed correctly when using an HDD  
camcorder, connect the HDD camcorder to the  
LINE IN jack and follow the instructions of  
page 72.  
Connect an HDD camcorder to the USB jack  
on the recorder.  
Refer as well to the instruction manual  
supplied with the HDD camcorder before  
connecting.  
• The recorder can recognise and store the  
shooting date and time information of up to 10  
HDD camcorders. If you connect 11 or more  
HDD camcorders, one-touch dubbing and  
“Incremental Dubbing” cannot be made  
properly.  
1 Turn on your HDD camcorder and the  
recorder.  
2 Connect your HDD camcorder to the  
USB jack on the front panel.  
DVD recorder  
to USB jack  
USB cable  
(not supplied)  
USB output  
HDD camcorder  
: Signal flow  
3 Set your HDD camcorder to the USB  
connection mode (example:  
COMPUTER” or “ USB  
CONNECT”).  
For details, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with the HDD  
camcorder.  
To restart the connected USB device  
Select “Restart USB Device” of “USB” in  
the “Options 2” setup (page 142).  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
One-TouchDubbingfrom Dubbing from HDD  
HDD Camcorder (ONE-  
TOUCH DUB)  
Camcorder Using the On-  
Screen Display (HDD-  
Cam Dubbing)  
HDD  
You can dub contents of your HDD  
camcorder onto the HDD of the recorder  
with a single press of the ONE-TOUCH  
DUB button on the recorder.  
When dubbing from the HDD camcorder for  
the first time, all of the contents are dubbed  
to the recorder. The next time, only newly  
shot sessions that have not been dubbed yet  
are dubbed to the recorder.  
HDD  
You can dub the contents of your HDD  
camcorder onto the HDD of the recorder  
using the on-screen display.  
Methods to dub from the HDD camcorder  
include:  
• Incremental Dubbing  
The recorder automatically detects the  
contents recorded on the connected HDD  
camcorder, and starts dubbing from the  
contents following the last dubbed  
contents if there are contents that have  
already been dubbed.  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Preparing for HDD  
camcorder dubbing” on page 95, and  
press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder.  
The recorder starts dubbing the contents on  
the HDD camcorder to the HDD Title List of  
the recorder.  
The recorder turns off automatically if you  
do not use the recorder for more than  
20 minutes after the dubbing has finished.  
• Full Dubbing  
The recorder dubs all contents of the HDD  
camcorder, including the contents that  
have already been dubbed to the recorder.  
page 95.  
To stop during dubbing  
Press x REC STOP.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop dubbing.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “HDD-Cam/DV,” and press  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
• The one-touch dubbing button on the HDD  
camcorder does not function with the recorder.  
• In One-Touch Dubbing, the contents that have  
already been dubbed to the recorder cannot be  
dubbed again, even after you erase them from  
the recorder. To dub the same contents to the  
recorder again, dub the entire contents of the  
4 Select “HDD-Cam Dubbing,” and  
press ENTER.  
5 Select “Incremental Dubbing” or  
“Full Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
To dub newly shot contents only, select  
“Incremental Dubbing.”  
To dub all contents of the HDD  
camcorder, select “Full Dubbing.”  
The display asks for confirmation.  
• Data about the dubbed contents are all cleared  
when you reset the recorder (page 150).  
• If the USB jack and the DV IN jack on the  
recorder are both connected to a compatible  
digital video camera, One-Touch Dubbing is  
performed via the USB jack.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The recorder starts dubbing the contents  
on the HDD camcorder to the HDD Title  
List of the recorder.  
The recorder turns off automatically if  
you do not use the recorder for more  
than 20 minutes after the dubbing has  
finished.  
To stop dubbing  
Press x REC STOP. Or, select “Exit” in  
step 6, and press ENTER.  
b Note  
With “Incremental Dubbing,” the contents that  
have already been dubbed to the recorder are not  
dubbed again, even after you erase them from the  
recorder. You can dub only newly shot contents.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
z Hint  
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after  
the initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a  
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) or HDD.  
DV Camcorder Dubbing  
Before DV Camcorder  
Dubbing  
b Notes  
• You cannot make a recording while DV  
camcorder dubbing.  
• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not  
output signals.  
This section explains dubbing with a DV  
camcorder and playing the contents of a DV  
camcorder via the DV IN jack on the front  
panel. If you want to dub by way of the  
LINE IN jacks, see “Recording from  
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to  
the i.LINK standard.  
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for DV  
camcorder dubbing,” and then move on to  
the section on dubbing. For more  
information about i.LINK, see “About  
• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:  
– signal input to the DV IN jack on the front  
panel or recorder operation cannot be  
performed correctly when using a digital video  
Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack and  
follow the instructions of “Recording from  
– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do  
not connect a MICRO MV format digital video  
camera even if it has an i.LINK jack.  
– the images on the tape contain copy protection  
signals, which limit recording.  
• If you want to play DVDs dubbed from a DV  
camcorder on other DVD equipment, finalise the  
disc (page 46).  
How chapters are created  
• Set the recorder and DV camcorder to the same  
colour system (page 125).  
The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD  
become a single title. This title is divided  
into chapters. When dubbing to the HDD or  
a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) and when  
“Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On” in  
the “Recording” setup (page 136), each  
shooting session on the tape becomes a  
chapter on the disc. For other discs, the  
recorder divides the title into chapters  
according to the “Auto Chapter (Video)” or  
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” setting in  
the “Recording” setup (page 136).  
Hookups  
DVD recorder  
to DV IN  
Preparing for DV camcorder  
dubbing  
i.LINK cable  
You can connect a DV camcorder to the DV  
IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from  
a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is  
straightforward because the recorder will  
fast forward and rewind the tape for you –  
you do not need to operate your DV  
camcorder.  
(not supplied)  
DV output  
Refer as well to the instruction manual  
supplied with the DV camcorder before  
connecting.  
DV camcorder  
: Signal flow  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b Notes  
1 Press HDD or DVD to select the  
recording destination.  
• You cannot connect more than one piece of  
digital video equipment to the recorder.  
• You cannot control the recorder using another  
device or another recorder of the same model.  
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of  
the cassette memory onto the disc.  
If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.  
2 Insert the source DV/Digital8 format  
tape into your DV camcorder.  
For the recorder to record or edit, your  
DV camcorder must be set to video  
playback mode.  
• If you record from a DV/Digital8 format tape  
that is recorded in multiple sound tracks, such as  
a tape with multiple sampling frequencies  
(48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound or an  
unnatural sound will be output when playing  
back the sampling frequency switch point on the  
disc.  
• In order to use this recorder’s “Auto Chapter”  
setting (page 98), be sure to correctly set the  
clock on your DV camcorder before shooting.  
• The recorded picture may be momentarily  
affected or the start and end points of a title may  
be different from what you have set if the source  
DV/Digital8 format tape is in any of the  
following conditions. In this case, connect your  
digital video camera to the LINE IN jack and  
follow the instructions of “Recording from  
3 Press REC MODE on the remote  
repeatedly to select the recording  
mode.  
The recording mode changes as follows:  
For details about the recording mode,  
see page 154. Note that you cannot  
select further manual recording mode  
options.  
4 Set the “External Audio” setting in  
the “Audio In” setup (page 132).  
– There is a blank space in the recorded portion  
of the tape.  
– The tape’s time code is not sequential.  
– If the picture size or the recording mode on the  
tape being dubbed changes.  
• A blank or black coloured screen will be dubbed  
when the recorder is set to a different colour  
system from the DV tape contents’ system. Set  
“Input Line System” in the “Basic” setup to the  
same colour system as the DV tape contents’  
system (page 125).  
5 Set the “DV Input” setting in the  
“Audio In” setup (page 132).  
You are ready to start dubbing. Select  
one of the dubbing methods on the  
following pages.  
To playback DV/Digital8 format tape  
You can check the contents of DV/Digital8  
format tape before dubbing. For details, see  
page 101.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dubbing an Entire DV  
Format Tape (DV One-  
Touch Dubbing)  
Dubbing Selected  
Scenes (DV Manual  
Dubbing)  
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
+
RW  
-
-
+
R
RWVR RWVideo  
RWVR RWVideo  
HDD  
HDD  
-
-
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
RVideo  
RVR  
You can record the entire contents of a DV/  
Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single  
press of the ONE-TOUCH DUB button on  
the recorder. The recorder controls the DV  
camcorder for the whole process, and  
completes the recording.  
You can select and dub scenes while playing  
a DV/Digital8 format tape.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for DV  
camcorder dubbing” on page 98, and  
press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder.  
The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts  
recording the tape contents.  
After the recording is finished, the recorder  
rewinds the tape in the DV camcorder, and  
finalises the recorded disc (except DVD-  
RW/DVD-R (VR mode)) automatically.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “HDD-Cam/DV,” and press  
ENTER.  
4 Select “DV Manual Dubbing,” and  
press ENTER.  
5 Select the recording destination,  
“Record to Hard Disk Drive” or  
“Record to DVD,” and press ENTER.  
6 Press H.  
To stop during recording  
Press and hold x REC STOP for more than  
3 seconds.  
Note that it may take a few seconds for the  
recorder to stop recording.  
The scene starts to play.  
7 Find the point on the DV/Digital8  
format tape that you want to start  
dubbing from using m/M or c/  
C, and press X.  
b Notes  
• When a blank space between the recordings on  
the tape continues for more than two minutes,  
DV One-Touch Dubbing ends automatically.  
• The recorder will pause recording when there is  
a blank space or an image containing copy  
protection signals on the tape. The recorder will  
resume recording automatically when receiving  
a recordable signal.  
8 Select “Start Rec.,” and press  
ENTER.  
The recorder starts dubbing.  
9 Select “Pause Rec,” and press  
ENTER.  
The recorder pauses dubbing.  
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording  
starts (except for DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR  
mode)).  
10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to dub more  
scenes.  
• DV One-Touch Dubbing ends automatically  
when there are images containing copy  
protection signals at the beginning of the tape.  
• When connecting digital video cameras to both  
DV IN jack and USB jack, pressing the ONE-  
TOUCH DUB button starts dubbing from the  
HDD camcorder. Disconnect the HDD  
camcorder from the USB jack to dub from the  
DV camcorder.  
11 Select “Stop Rec,” and press ENTER.  
The selected scenes are dubbed as a  
single title.  
To exit “DV Manual Dubbing”  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
z Hint  
You can turn off the dubbing menu by pressing the  
DISPLAY button during dubbing. Press the  
DISPLAY button again to display the dubbing  
menu.  
Playing from a DV  
Camcorder  
b Note  
1 Connect your DV camcorder to the DV  
You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one  
second.  
IN jack on the front panel.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “HDD-Cam/DV,” and press  
ENTER.  
4 Select “DV Playback,” and press  
ENTER.  
5 Start playback on the DV camcorder.  
Images from the DV camcorder appear  
on your TV screen.  
To cancel playback  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
z Hint  
You can dub the playing tape contents. During  
playback, press HDD or DVD to select the  
dubbing destination, and press z REC. To stop  
dubbing, press x REC STOP.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparing for Using  
Jukebox  
Music Jukebox  
About Jukebox  
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on  
the recorder, or copy audio tracks from the  
connected USB device or CDs/DATA CDs/  
DATA DVDs to the HDD.  
There are two methods to use Jukebox:  
connecting the USB device or copying audio  
tracks to the HDD.  
When using Jukebox, you can do following:  
• Store audio tracks on the HDD.  
• Play audio tracks using various play  
modes.  
• Label tracks, albums, or artists.  
• Create a Playlist.  
Connecting the USB device  
You can connect a USB device to the USB  
jack on the recorder to listen to the MP3  
audio tracks or copy to the HDD. Refer to  
the operating instructions supplied with the  
USB device before connecting.  
Notes on copying  
• You cannot copy audio tracks on the HDD to  
discs or USB devices.  
• Some audio tracks may not be copied depending  
on the file size.  
DVD recorder  
• An artist name, album name, and MP3 audio  
track name are copied, and albums and MP3  
tracks are stored in each artist folder. However,  
albums and MP3 audio tracks are stored in the  
“Unknown” folder when their artist name cannot  
be copied.  
• Audio tracks from a CD are stored in the artist  
folder labelled “Unknown.” Names are  
automaticallylabelled;A_*****_F_*****for  
album, “A_*****_F_*****_T_*****” for  
audio tracks.  
to USB jack  
USB device  
b Note  
Some USB devices may not work with this  
recorder.  
• When copying is stopped partway, tracks that  
have finished copying before you stop will  
remain copied onto the HDD as an album.  
You can check which albums have been copied  
in the Music Jukebox list (page 104).  
• No other operations are available when copying  
audio tracks.  
• While copying audio tracks, timer recordings are  
unavailable. If the timer is set during copying,  
the recorder starts the timer recording after  
copying is finished.  
Copying tracks or albums  
(USB t HDD)  
You can copy up to 99 albums or 999 audio  
tracks on the USB device to the HDD.  
1 Connect the USB device to the USB  
jack on the recorder (page 102).  
• Copy-protected CDs cannot be copied to the  
HDD.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
3 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press  
ENTER.  
4 Select “Listen to Music from USB  
Device,” and press ENTER.  
The “Music Jukebox (USB)” appears.  
5 Select an album to copy using M/m,  
and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
6 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press  
Copying tracks or albums on  
ENTER.  
the HDD (HDD y HDD)  
7 Select an item using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
To copy all albums, select “Copy all to  
HDD.”  
The System Menu appears.  
To copy the selected albums, select  
“Copy to HDD.”  
The display asks for confirmation.  
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit,” and  
8 Select “Yes” using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
press ENTER.  
The “Music Jukebox (HDD)” appears.  
The albums are copied to the HDD.  
• To copy more albums, repeat from  
step 5.  
4 Select an artist using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
5 Select an album using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
To cancel copying  
Press ENTER.  
If you want to copy the album, press ,  
instead of ENTER, then go to step 7.  
6 Select a track to copy using M/m, and  
Copying audio tracks  
(DISC t HDD)  
press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
7 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press  
1 Insert a disc that you are going to  
copy to the HDD.  
ENTER.  
8 Select “Copy Album” or “Copy  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
Track” using M/m, and press ENTER.  
The System Menu appears.  
9 Select a copy destination (an artist or  
album) using M/m, and press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
3 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.  
4 Select “DVD/CD -> HDD” using M/m,  
and press ENTER.  
The copying starts.  
10 Select “Yes” using </,, and  
press ENTER.  
The albums or tracks are copied to the  
HDD.  
• To copy more tracks or albums, repeat  
from step 4.  
To cancel copying  
Press ENTER.  
b Note  
Before copying, select “CD” or “MP3” under  
“Data Format” in the Title List (DVD/CD)  
To cancel copying  
Press ENTER.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To scroll the list display by page (Page  
mode)  
Press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE (next)  
while the Music Jukebox list is displayed.  
Each time you press SUBTITLE (previous)/  
ANGLE (next), the Music Jukebox list  
changes to the previous/next page of the list.  
Playing Audio Tracks  
Using Jukebox/USB  
Device  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
To change the play information (HDD  
only)  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press  
ENTER.  
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.  
Each time you press the button, information  
below the artist/album/track list is changed.  
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit” or  
“Listen to Music from USB Device,”  
and press ENTER.  
About the Playlist and Original list (HDD  
only)  
You can switch the “Music Jukebox (HDD)”  
to show tracks in Original list or Playlist.  
To listen to the audio tracks on the  
HDD, select “Listen to Music / Edit.”  
To listen to the MP3 audio tracks from  
the connected USB device, select  
“Listen to Music from USB Device.”  
The Music Jukebox list appears.  
1
2
3
Press < while the “Music Jukebox  
(HDD)” is displayed.  
Select “Play List” using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Select an item using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Item  
Display  
Original  
Tracks in the Original list.  
Tracks in each Playlist.  
Play List 1  
Play List 2  
Play List 3  
Play List 4  
4 Select an artist, album, or track, and  
press H.  
Favourites  
Tracks in order of  
(HDD only) To display an album list,  
select an artist using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
playback frequency. The  
track that is most often  
played is listed at the top.  
To display a track list, select an album  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
Playback starts.  
To change the display mode (Original list  
only)  
1
2
3
Press < while the “Music Jukebox  
(HDD)” is displayed.  
To stop playback  
Press x (stop).  
Select “Display Mode” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
To return to the previous display  
Press O RETURN. If you cannot return to  
the artist list or album list using  
Select an item using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
O RETURN, see “To change the display  
Item  
Display  
Artist (HDD Artist list appears.  
only)  
Album  
Track  
Album list appears.  
Track list appears.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Buttons  
Operations  
Adding audio tracks to a  
Playlist (HDD only)  
X (pause) Pauses playback.  
To resume normal playback,  
press H.  
You can add audio tracks on the HDD to the  
Playlist. You can add up to 25 audio tracks  
to each Playlist.  
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)  
1 After step 2 of “Playing Audio Tracks  
“Listen to Music / Edit,” and press  
ENTER.  
You can repeatedly play tracks or a single  
track.  
1 Press , during playback.  
If you are playing tracks on the HDD, go  
to step 3.  
Switch the display to the Original list  
2 (USB device only) Select “Play  
Mode” using M/m, and press ENTER.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
2 Select a track to add to the Playlist,  
and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
3 Select “Repeat” using M/m, and  
3 Select “Add to Play List,” and press  
ENTER.  
press ENTER.  
4 Select an item using M/m.  
“Repeat Artist” (HDD only): repeats  
tracks of the current artist.  
“Repeat Album”: repeats the current  
album.  
4 Select a Playlist, and press ENTER.  
The track is added to the selected  
Playlist.  
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to select all of the  
tracks you want to add to the Playlist.  
• To check the Playlist tracks, switch to  
the Playlist.  
“Repeat Track”: repeats the current  
track.  
“Repeat Play List” (HDD only): repeats  
the current Playlist.  
“Repeat Programme” (USB device  
only): repeats the current programme  
Playback options  
5 Press ENTER.  
Buttons  
Operations  
Repeat play starts.  
./> Goes to the next or previous  
(previous/ track when pressed during  
next)  
playback.  
To cancel Repeat play  
m/M  
(fast  
reverse/  
fast  
Fast reverses/fast forwards the  
disc when pressed during  
playback.  
Search speed changes as  
follows:  
Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in step 4.  
b Note  
You can select “Repeat Programme” only during  
Programme play.  
forward)  
fast reverse fast forward  
mFR1 T t  
M
FF1  
FF2  
mFR2 T T t t  
M
When you press and hold the  
button, fast forward/fast  
reverse continues at the  
selected speed until you  
release the button.  
To resume normal playback,  
press H.  
,continued  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
To cancel Programme play  
Set “Programme” to “Cancel Programme  
Play” in the “Play Mode” menu during  
playback.  
Creating your own programme  
(Programme) (USB device only)  
You can play the contents of the connected  
USB device in the order you want by  
arranging the order of the tracks on the  
connected USB device to create your own  
programme. You can make a programme of  
up to 24 tracks.  
To erase the programme  
Set “Programme” to “Erase Programme  
List” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
z Hints  
• The programme you made remains after  
Programme play finishes. To play the same  
programme again, set “Programme” to “Start  
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.  
However, the programme is cleared after you  
press [/1.  
• You can repeat Programme play. During  
Programme play, set “Repeat” to “Repeat  
Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu  
1 Press , while the “Music Jukebox  
(USB)” is displayed.  
2 Select “Play Mode” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
The “Play Mode” menu appears.  
3 Select “Programme,” and press  
ENTER.  
4 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and  
press ENTER.  
5 Select an album (example: Album 01)  
using M/m, and press ,.  
6 Select a track (example: Track 001)  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
The track is programmed.  
If you make a mistake, select the step  
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,  
and press CLEAR.  
7 To programme other tracks, press  
</M/m/, to select a step number,  
and repeat steps 5 and 6.  
8 Press H.  
Programme play starts.  
To stop Programme play  
Press x (stop).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
“Erase”: Erases the selected artist/  
album/track. Select “Yes” when asked  
for confirmation.  
Managing Audio Tracks  
on the Music Jukebox  
(HDD only)  
“Edit”: Allows you to make the  
following edits.  
• “Artist Name”: Allows you to enter or  
re-enter an artist name (page 44).  
• “Album Name”: Allows you to enter  
or re-enter an album name (page 44).  
• “Track Name”: Allows you to enter or  
re-enter a track name (page 44).  
• “Copy Album”: Allows you to copy an  
• “Copy Track”: Allows you to copy a  
track (page 103).  
“Repeat”: Repeats playback of artist/  
album/track (page 105).  
“Add to Play List”: Allows you to add  
tracks to a Playlist (page 105).  
“Play List Name”: Allows you to enter  
or re-enter a Playlist name (up to 12  
characters) (page 44).  
You can erase or label artists/albums/tracks  
on the HDD.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press  
ENTER.  
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit,” and  
press ENTER.  
The “Music Jukebox (HDD)” appears.  
b Note  
You cannot edit audio tracks on the connected  
USB device.  
4 Select an artist, album, or track, and  
press ,.  
To display an album list, select an artist  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
To display a track list, select an album  
using M/m, and press ENTER.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Preparing for Using the  
“Photo Album” Function  
Photo Album  
About the “Photo  
Album” Function  
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on  
the recorder, or copy JPEG image files from  
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected  
USB device to the HDD.  
The “Photo Album” function enables you to  
do following.  
• Store JPEG image files on the HDD.  
• View JPEG image files on the HDD,  
DATA DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs)/  
DATA CDs, or connected USB device.  
• Edit JPEG image files.  
• Print JPEG image files.  
• Copy JPEG image files and slideshow to  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs.  
Connecting the USB device  
You can connect a USB device (digital still  
camera, Memory card reader, and USB  
memory) to the USB jack on the recorder to  
view JPEG image files or copy to the HDD.  
Refer to the operating instructions supplied  
with the USB device before connecting.  
DVD recorder  
• Create a slideshow with your favourite  
music and graphic effects (x-Pict Story).  
to USB jack  
USB cable (not supplied)  
USB output  
Digital still camera  
: Signal flow  
b Note  
Some USB devices may not work with this  
recorder.  
Copying JPEG image files to  
the HDD (DISC/USB t HDD)  
1 Insert a disc that you are going to  
copy to the HDD or connect the USB  
device to the USB jack on the  
recorder.  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
10 Select “Copy to HDD,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
4 Select the item, and press ENTER.  
To copy from DATA CDs/DATA  
DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs), select  
“View Photos on a DVD/CD.”  
To copy from the connected USB  
device, select “View Photos on a USB  
Device.”  
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
Copying all JPEG image files  
from the connected USB  
device (USB t DVD-RW/DVD-  
R)  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Example: DVD/CD  
1 Connect the USB device to the USB  
jack on the recorder.  
2 Insert a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video  
mode).  
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
5 Select an album or JPEG image file  
using M/m, and press ,.  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
The sub-menu appears.  
5 Select “Copy Photos from a Digital  
6 Select “Multi-Mode” using M/m, and  
Camera,” and press ENTER.  
press ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
• To copy all the albums and JPEG  
image files, select “Copy all to HDD,”  
and go to step 11.  
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
• To copy the album or file selected in  
step 5 only, select “Copy to HDD,”  
and go to step 11.  
z Hint  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.  
7 Select an album or JPEG image file,  
and press ENTER.  
b Notes  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, press , to  
select “Single-Mode” from the sub-  
menu.  
• During copying, other operations cannot be  
performed.  
• While copying JPEG image files, timer  
recordings are unavailable. If the timer is set  
during copying, the recorder starts the timer  
recording after copying is finished.  
8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the  
albums or JPEG image files you want  
to copy.  
9 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
,continued  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12 Select the destination album using  
M/m, and press ENTER.  
Copying JPEG image files or  
albums on the HDD  
(HDD y HDD)  
The display asks for confirmation.  
13 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
b Note  
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
Albums or JPEG image files are not copied to the  
HDD in the following cases.  
ENTER.  
– when the HDD disc space is insufficient for  
copying.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the  
– when there are already the maximum number of  
files and/or albums on the HDD.  
HDD,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
4 Select an album using M/m.  
Copying JPEG image albums  
to a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/  
DVD-R)  
To copy the selected album, go to step 6.  
To copy a JPEG image file, go to step 5.  
5 Press ENTER, and select a JPEG  
image file using M/m.  
You can copy the edited JPEG image albums  
to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).  
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a  
video file. You can play the slideshow on  
other DVD equipment that may not be  
compatible with the playback of JPEG  
image files.  
6 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
7 Select “Multi-Mode” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
• To copy the selected album, select  
“Copy Album Contents” in “Album  
Options,” and go to step 12.  
• To copy the selected files, select  
“Copy” in “File Options,” and go to  
step 12.  
1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video  
mode).  
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
8 Select an album or JPEG image file,  
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
and press ENTER.  
ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, press , to  
select “Single-Mode” from the sub-  
menu.  
4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the  
HDD,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
5 Select an album using M/m, and  
press ,.  
9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the  
albums or JPEG image files you want  
to copy.  
The sub-menu appears.  
6 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
10 Press ,.  
To copy the album selected in step 5  
only, go to step 10.  
The sub-menu appears.  
11 Select “Copy,” and press ENTER.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7 Select an album, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
Copying JPEG image files to a  
disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, press , to  
select “Single-Mode” from the sub-  
menu.  
You can copy the edited JPEG image files to  
a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).  
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a  
video file. You can play the slideshow on  
other DVD equipment that may not be  
compatible with the playback of JPEG  
image files.  
8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the  
albums you want to copy.  
9 Press ,.  
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Copying JPEG  
The sub-menu appears.  
10 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press  
page 110.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The selected JPEG image albums are  
copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the  
disc.  
2 Select an album using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
The photo list appears.  
The JPEG image album names are  
automatically labelled as  
“***ALBUM.”  
If you want to play the disc on other  
DVD equipment, finalise the disc  
3 Select a JPEG image file using M/m,  
and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press  
ENTER.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
To copy the JPEG image file selected in  
step 3 only, go to step 8.  
5 Select a JPEG image file, and press  
z Hints  
ENTER.  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.  
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which  
albums have been copied (page 112).  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, press , to  
select “Single-Mode” from the sub-  
menu.  
b Notes  
• You may not be able to play the slideshow  
depending on DVD equipment.  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a  
recordable DVD which has been recorded using  
other recorders/devices.  
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not  
be able to play on other equipment.  
• You can record up to 99 slideshows to a disc.  
• When copying an album containing more than  
99 JPEG image files to a disc, slideshows will be  
created with every 99 JPEG image files and  
recorded to a disc.  
6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the JPEG  
image files you want to copy.  
7 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
8 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
• For DVDs, the available disc space does not  
increase even if you erase slideshows.  
,continued  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
9 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.  
The selected JPEG image files are  
copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the  
disc.  
Using the “Photo  
Album” List  
The JPEG image file names are  
automatically labelled as “PHOT****.”  
If you want to play the disc on other  
DVD equipment, finalise the disc  
You can play JPEG image files on the HDD,  
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected  
USB device using the “Photo Album” list.  
• To cancel, select “No.”  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
To select a JPEG image file from a  
different album  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
1
Switch to the album list in step 5.  
For instructions, see “To switch  
3 Select the item, and press ENTER.  
To play JPEG image files on the HDD,  
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.”  
To play JPEG image files on DATA  
CDs/DATA DVDs, select “View Photos  
on a DVD/CD.”  
2
3
Select an album using M/m, and press  
<.  
Switch to the JPEG image file list.  
For instructions, see “To switch  
To play JPEG image files on the  
connected USB device, select “View  
Photos on a USB Device.”  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
4
Select a JPEG image file using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
4 Select an album using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
To show the 4-Photo List or 1-Photo  
List, press < to select “Title View,”  
and press ENTER, then select “4  
Photos” or “1 Photo” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
z Hints  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.  
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which JPEG  
image files have been copied (page 112).  
b Notes  
• You may not be able to play the slideshow  
depending on DVD equipment.  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a  
recordable DVD which has been recorded using  
other recorders/devices.  
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not  
be able to play on other equipment.  
• You can record up to 99 slideshows to a disc.  
• For DVDs, the available disc space does not  
increase even if you erase slideshows.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
12-Photo List (Example: HDD)  
A Album name  
B Album size  
C Sub-menu:  
Press , to display the sub-menu.  
The sub-menu displays options  
applicable only to the selected item. The  
displayed options differ depending upon  
the model, situation, and disc type.  
For details about the sub-menu options,  
m
4-Photo List  
Sub-menu  
D Scroll bar:  
Appears when all of the JPEG image  
files do not fit on the list. To view the  
hidden JPEG image files, press M/m.  
E Album and JPEG image file  
information:  
m
Displays the image, JPEG image file  
number, recording date and time, JPEG  
image file name, and JPEG image file  
size. “ ” appears for protected JPEG  
image files.  
1-Photo List  
F Remaining space on the HDD  
To scroll the list display by page (Page  
mode)  
Press ./> while the “Photo Album”  
list is displayed. Each time you press ./  
>, the “Photo Album” list changes to the  
previous/next page of albums/JPEG image  
files.  
,continued  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To switch between the album list and  
JPEG image file list  
Playing a slideshow  
1
2
3
Press < while the “Photo Album” list  
is displayed.  
Select “Display Mode” using M/m, and  
press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Switch between the album list and JPEG  
image file list, if necessary.  
Select “File” or “Album” using M/m,  
and press ENTER.  
2 Select an album or JPEG image file  
using M/m, and press H.  
The slideshow starts.  
z Hints  
• You can switch the thumbnail picture on the  
album list among the JPEG image files in the  
selected album by pressing m/M.  
• You can switch to the previous or next album by  
pressing m/M on the JPEG image file list.  
z Hint  
You can start a slideshow by selecting “Start  
Slideshow” from the sub-menu.  
To turn off the “Photo Album” list  
Press SYSTEM MENU.  
b Notes  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures  
may be displayed with black bands at top and  
bottom, or left and right.  
To display the detailed information  
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to  
display. This is not a malfunction.  
1
2
Select a JPEG image file, and press ,.  
Select “Detailed Information,” and press  
ENTER.  
The detailed information for the selected  
JPEG image file appears.  
To stop a slideshow  
Press x (stop) or O RETURN.  
To pause a slideshow  
To reload the files or folders  
Press X (pause).  
When a disc or the connected USB device  
contains 1,000 or more files and/or 100 or  
more folders, select “Read next” in the  
“Photo Album” list, and press ENTER to  
view unloaded files or folders.  
To view the previous/next image during a  
slideshow  
Press ./>.  
It may take a few minutes to load files or  
folders.  
To zoom an image  
Press ZOOM repeatedly during a slideshow.  
Each time you press ZOOM, the  
magnification changes as shown below.  
t t normal magnification  
You can move the area you want to zoom  
using </M/m/,.  
b Note  
The thumbnail for a file that cannot be playable on  
the recorder is displayed as “ .”  
To rotate an image  
Press ANGLE repeatedly during a  
slideshow.  
Each time you press ANGLE, the image  
turns clockwise by 90°.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
To play a slideshow with the sound (HDD  
only)  
You can enjoy a slideshow while listening to  
the sound stored in the HDD. First prepare  
Music Playlists by adding audio tracks using  
Creating a Slideshow  
with Your Favourite  
Music and Graphic  
Effects (x-Pict Story)  
(HDD only)  
1
Select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD”  
You can easily create and play your own  
slideshow with your favourite music in  
Music Playlist and graphic effects using the  
JPEG image files on the HDD (x-Pict Story).  
First prepare Music Playlists by adding  
audio tracks using Jukebox (see “Adding  
page 105). The created x-Pict Story is  
automatically stored in the Title List (HDD)  
and you can copy it onto a recordable disc.  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Switch between the album list and JPEG  
image file list, if necessary.  
2
3
4
5
Select an album or JPEG image file  
using M/m, and press ,.  
Select “Start Audio Slideshow,” and  
press ENTER.  
Select the desired Music Playlist or  
“Favourites” using </,.  
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
The slideshow and the playback from  
the first track of the selected Music  
Playlist start.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
b Notes  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
• While playing a slideshow with the sound, you  
cannot do the following:  
3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the  
– Zoom, rotate, skip or pause an image.  
– Display information on the screen by pressing  
DISPLAY.  
HDD,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album (HDD)” list appears.  
• If there is no audio track in the selected Music  
Playlist, the slideshow is played back with no  
sound.  
4 Select an album, and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
5 Select “Create x-Pict Story” using M/  
m, and press ENTER.  
,continued  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
b Notes  
6 Select a graphic effect and a Music  
Playlist using </M/m/,.  
• “Theme”: Select a theme. The  
recorder adds graphic effects  
according to the theme you set from  
the following:  
• You cannot make a recording while creating an  
x-Pict Story.  
• If there is no JPEG image file in the selected  
folder, you cannot create an x-Pict Story.  
• If there is no audio track in the selected Music  
Playlist, the x-Pict Story is created with no  
sound.  
• The selected Music Playlist may not be played  
back to the end depending on the number of  
JPEG image files.  
• If the HDD is full, a warning message appears  
and you cannot create an x-Pict Story.  
• While creating an x-Pict Story, you cannot do  
the following:  
– Zoom, rotate, skip or pause an image.  
– Display information on the screen by pressing  
DISPLAY.  
“Happy moments (1)”: with simple  
graphic effects  
“Happy moments (2)”: with simple  
graphic effects rapidly changing  
“Nostalgic memories”: in  
monochrome  
“Sweetest recollections”: with moving  
graphic effects  
“Blissful life”: with moving graphic  
effects rapidly changing  
• The order of graphic effects changes at random  
every time you create an x-Pict Story in the same  
theme.  
“Normal”: no graphic effects  
• “Play List”: Select the desired Music  
Playlist or “Favourites.” For an  
explanation of how to make a Music  
• Do not disconnect (remove) or connect (insert)  
the USB cable, i.LINK cable or CAM while  
creating an x-Pict Story. This may cause the x-  
Pict Story to be created incorrectly.  
• The graphic effect may not show a smooth  
motion or not appear correctly on the created x-  
Pict Story depending on conditions, such as size  
of the image files.  
7 Select “Next,” and press ENTER.  
The copyright message appears on the  
screen.  
8 Select “Yes” using </,, and  
To play an x-Pict Story  
You can play a created x-Pict Story from the  
Title List on the HDD.  
press ENTER.  
The x-Pict Story is saved as a video file  
in the Title List on the HDD.  
The title names are automatically  
labelled as “x-Pict_Story ***” using the  
name of the selected album folder.  
To dub an x-Pict Story  
You can dub a created x-Pict Story to DVDs.  
on page 89. If you want to play the disc on  
other DVD equipment, finalise the disc  
To stop creating x-Pict Story  
Press and hold x REC STOP for more than  
3 seconds.  
z Hints  
• The order of audio tracks in the created x-Pict  
Story is followed by that of Music Playlist. If  
you want to change its order, change the order of  
Music Playlist before creating an x-Pict Story.  
• If the selected folder has no name, the title names  
are automatically labelled with the date when the  
x-Pict Story was created.  
• An x-Pict Story is created in the HQ mode.  
• To edit x-Pict Story titles, see “Erasing and  
Editing” on page 82.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
“Multi-Mode”: Selects multiple albums  
or JPEG image files to edit.  
Managing JPEG Image  
Files on the HDD  
“Copy all to HDD”: Copies all the  
albums and JPEG image files to the  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
“Copy to HDD”: Copies the selected  
album or JPEG image file to the HDD  
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
“File Options”  
• “Erase”: Erases the selected JPEG  
image file.  
• “Copy”: Copies the selected JPEG  
image file (page 110).  
• “Rename File”: Changes the selected  
JPEG image file name (page 44).  
• “Protect”: Protects the selected JPEG  
image file. Select again to cancel the  
protection.  
3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the  
HDD,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album (HDD)” list appears.  
4 Select an album or JPEG image file,  
and press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.  
You can make the following edits to the  
album/JPEG image file.  
“Print”: Prints the selected JPEG image  
“Start Slideshow”: Starts a slideshow  
“Detailed Information”: Displays the  
detailed information for the selected  
JPEG image file (page 114).  
“Start Audio Slideshow” (HDD only):  
Starts a slideshow with the sound  
“Single-Mode”: Cancels “Multi-Mode.”  
“Create x-Pict Story”: Creates a new x-  
Pict Story (page 115).  
“New Album”: Creates a new album.  
“Album Options”  
• “Erase Album”: Erases the selected  
album.  
• “Copy Album Contents”: Copies all  
JPEG image files in the selected album  
• “Rename Album”: Changes the  
selected album name (page 44).  
• “Protect Album Contents”: Protects all  
JPEG image files in the selected  
album.  
• “Cancel Protection”: Cancels  
protection of all JPEG image files in  
the selected album.  
“Copy to DVD”: Copies the selected  
album or JPEG image file to a DVD  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
5 Select the item, and press ENTER.  
To print JPEG image files on the HDD,  
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.”  
To print JPEG image files on a DATA  
DVD/DATA CD, select “View Photos  
on a DVD/CD.”  
Printing JPEG Image  
Files  
You can print JPEG image files on the HDD,  
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected  
USB device by connecting a PictBridge-  
compatible printer to the USB jack on the  
recorder.  
To print JPEG image files from the  
connected USB device, select “View  
Photos on a USB Device.”  
The “Photo Album” list appears.  
Refer to the instructions supplied with the  
printer.  
6 Select an album, and press ENTER.  
1 Connect a PictBridge-compatible  
printer to the USB jack on the  
recorder.  
DVD recorder  
7 Select a file using M/m, and press  
,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
to USB jack  
8 Select the item, and press ENTER.  
To print two or more files, select “Multi-  
Mode.”  
PictBridge-compatible  
printer  
To print the file selected in step 7 only,  
go to step 12.  
9 Select a file, and press ENTER.  
A check mark appears in the check box  
by the selected item.  
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER  
again.  
• To clear all check marks, select  
“Single-Mode.”  
2 Connect the USB device to the USB  
jack on the recorder.  
When printing JPEG image files on the  
HDD or DATA DVDs/DATA CDs,  
skip this step.  
10 Repeat step 9 to select all files you  
want to print.  
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.  
The System Menu appears.  
11 Press ,.  
The sub-menu appears.  
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press  
ENTER.  
12 Select “Print,” and press ENTER.  
The “Photo Album” menu appears.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
13 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.  
You can set the paper size and layout.  
Refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with the printer.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To cancel printing  
Press ENTER.  
To display the connected printer  
Select “Confirm Printer” of “USB” in the  
“Options 2” setup (page 142).  
To restart the connected USB device  
Select “Restart USB Device” of “USB” in  
the “Options 2” setup (page 142).  
z Hint  
Printing options, such as paper size or layout,  
differ depending on the printer. For details, refer to  
the instructions supplied with the printer.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For playback  
Dynamic  
Produces a bold  
Settings and Adjustments  
dynamic picture by  
increasing the picture  
contrast and the colour  
intensity.  
Adjusting Picture  
Quality  
Standard  
Displays a standard  
picture.  
+
+
R
-
-
HDD  
RW  
RWVR RWVideo  
*
-
-
RVideo  
RVR  
DVD VCD  
DATA DVD  
Professional Displays an original  
*
DATA CD  
picture.  
* DivX video file only  
Memory1/  
Memory2/  
Memory3  
Your own settings. To  
create your own  
settings, see “To create  
You can adjust the picture quality from the  
connected equipment, such as a TV or VCR,  
and also the picture quality of broadcasts  
that the recorder can receive by selecting a  
preset setting. You can also adjust the  
To check the detailed settings for the  
selected preset, press DISPLAY.  
picture quality by changing detailed settings,  
and store up to three settings in the memory.  
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.  
For adjusting playback picture quality,  
press SYSTEM MENU during  
playback.  
To create your own setting  
1
2
Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or  
“Memory3” in step 3.  
The System Menu appears.  
Select “Detailed Settings,” and press  
ENTER.  
The display for adjusting detailed  
settings appears.  
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and  
press ENTER.  
3 Select a preset setting using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
3
4
Select an item using M/m, and adjust  
settings using </,.  
For explanation of each setting, see the  
tables below.  
For recording  
Tuner  
VCR  
DTV  
TV broadcast  
Video cassettes  
Digital broadcast  
Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.  
The setting is automatically stored as the  
setting you selected in step 1.  
Memory1/ Your own settings. To  
Memory2/ create your own settings,  
Memory3  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Setting options for recording picture  
quality  
For details about each setting, see the  
explanation of the display.  
White  
Enhancer*  
Adjusts the intensity of white.  
Adjusts the intensity of black.  
Black  
Enhancer*  
Prog.  
Motion  
Adjusts the progressive video  
signal when “Component  
Video Out” is set to  
“Progressive” (page 130) or  
when using the HDMI  
connection.  
Black  
Level*  
Selects the black level (setup  
level) for the NTSC video  
signals.  
Select “ON” to set the black  
level of the input signals to the  
standard level. Normally,  
select “OFF” position.  
Select “Motion” for a picture,  
including subjects that move  
dynamically.  
Select “Still” for a picture  
with little movement.  
Hue*  
Adjusts the colour balance.  
Chroma  
Level*  
Makes the colours deeper or  
lighter.  
Cinema  
Converts the progressive  
video signal to match the type  
of DVD software that you are  
watching when “Component  
Video Out” is set to  
“Progressive” (page 130) or  
when using the HDMI  
connection.  
Select “Auto” to detect the  
software type (Film-based or  
Video-based) automatically  
and select the appropriate  
conversion mode. Normally  
select this position.  
Select “Off” to fix the  
conversion mode to the mode  
for Video-based software.  
* For analogue broadcasting only  
Setting options for playback picture  
quality  
For details about each setting, see the  
explanation of the display.  
Prog.  
Motion  
Adjusts the progressive video  
signal when “Component  
Video Out” is set to  
“Progressive” (page 130) or  
when “Screen Resolution” is  
set to other than “720 x 576i”  
(or “720 x 480i”) (page 139).  
Select “Motion” for a picture,  
including subjects that move  
dynamically.  
3-D Y/C*  
Adjusts the brightness/colour  
separation for the video  
signals.  
Select “Motion” for a picture,  
including subjects that move  
dynamically.  
Select “Still” for a picture  
with little movement.  
Cinema  
Converts the progressive  
video signal to match the type  
of DVD software that you are  
watching when “Component  
Video Out” is set to  
“Progressive” (page 130) or  
when “Screen Resolution” is  
set to other than “720 x 576i”  
(or “720 x 480i”) (page 139).  
Select “Auto1” to  
automatically detect the  
software type (Film-based or  
Video-based) and select the  
appropriate conversion mode.  
Normally select this position.  
If the picture appears  
Select “Still” for a picture  
with little movement.  
YNR*  
Reduces noise contained in  
(luminance the luminance element of the  
noise  
reduction)  
video signal.  
CNR*  
(chroma  
noise  
Reduces noise contained in  
the chroma element of the  
video signal.  
reduction)  
Adjusts the sharpness of  
images outlines.  
Detail*  
unnatural, select “Auto2,”  
“On,” or “Off.”  
White  
AGC*  
Turn on for automatic white  
level adjustment.  
,continued  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b Notes  
YNR  
Reduces noise contained in  
• If the outlines of the images on your screen  
become blurred, set “BNR” and/or “MNR” to  
“Off.”  
(luminance the luminance element of the  
noise  
reduction)  
video signal.  
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,  
the above BNR or MNR effects may be hard to  
discern. Also, these functions may not work with  
some screen sizes.  
• The following settings are not available for the  
signals output from the HDMI jack.  
– “Sharpness”  
– “White Enhancer”  
– “Black Enhancer”  
– “Black Level”  
– “Gamma Correction”  
BNR(block Reduces “block noise” or  
noise  
reduction)  
mosaic-like patterns in the  
picture.  
MNR  
(mosquito  
noise  
Reduces the faint noise  
appearing around the outlines  
of the images. The noise  
reduction effects are  
automatically adjusted within  
each setting range according  
to the video bit rate and other  
factors.  
reduction)  
– “Hue”  
– “Chroma Level”  
Sharpness Sharpens the outlines of the  
images.  
Adjusts the sharpness of  
images outlines.  
Detail  
White  
Enhancer  
Adjusts the intensity of white.  
Adjusts the intensity of black.  
Black  
Enhancer  
Black  
Level  
Selects the black level (setup  
level) for the video signals.  
Select “ON” to raise the black  
level. Select this when the  
picture appears too dark.  
Select “OFF” to set the black  
level of the input signals to the  
standard level. Normally,  
select this position.  
Gamma  
Correction  
Adjusts how dark areas look.  
Adjusts the colour balance.  
Hue  
Chroma  
Level  
Makes the colours deeper or  
lighter.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Setup Menus  
Disc Settings (Disc  
Setup)  
You can change the settings of the recorder,  
such as picture quality settings, audio  
settings, etc.  
You can adjust DVD related settings.  
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the  
recorder is in stop mode.  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
You can label a disc.  
For details, see page 45.  
2 Select “Disc Setup” or “Initial  
Setup” using M/m, and press ENTER.  
3 Select the desired setup item using  
M/m, then press ENTER.  
Protect Disc  
You can protect a disc against erasure.  
For details, see page 45.  
See the explanations in the following  
sections.  
The default settings are underlined.  
Format DVD-RW (DVD-RW only)  
The recorder automatically starts formatting  
in VR mode or Video mode, whichever is  
selected below, when a new, unformatted  
DVD-RW is inserted.  
VR Mode  
Automatically formats the  
disc in VR mode.  
Video  
Mode  
Automatically formats the  
disc in Video mode.  
Format  
You can manually re-format a DVD+RW,  
DVD-RW, or DVD-R disc to make a blank  
disc.  
For details, see page 49.  
Finalise  
Finalises a disc to play it on other DVD  
equipment.  
For details, see page 46.  
,continued  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Optimise HDD  
Recorder Settings  
(Basic)  
As you record, erase and edit recordings  
repeatedly, the HDD file system gradually  
becomes fragmented. To ‘clean up’ all the  
fragmented files, optimise the HDD  
periodically. When the HDD needs  
optimising, a message recommending  
optimisation will appear automatically.  
To cancel optimisation, press ENTER. The  
HDD will be partly optimised.  
You can make clock and other recorder-  
related settings.  
Clock Setting  
The recorder will automatically set the clock  
when any digital channels have been  
scanned and stored.  
b Notes  
• It will take about eight hours to optimise the  
HDD. During optimisation, other operations,  
such as recording or playback, cannot be  
performed.  
Auto (Auto Clock Set)  
Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when  
a programme position in your local area  
broadcasts a time signal.  
• You cannot optimise the HDD when the HDD  
disc space is insufficient for optimising. Erase  
titles to open up disc space (page 83).  
1
Press </, repeatedly until the  
programme position of the station that  
carries a time signal appears.  
Format HDD.  
2
Press m to select “Start,” and press  
ENTER.  
You can format the HDD and resolve the  
problem when the hard disk error occurred.  
“Format HDD.” can be selected only when  
the hard disk needs formatting. Note that all  
of the recorded content on the HDD will be  
erased.  
• If the recorder does not receive a time  
signal from any station, press  
O RETURN and set the clock  
manually.  
• If the Auto Clock Set function did not  
set the clock correctly for your local  
area, try another station for the Auto  
Clock Set function or set the clock  
manually.  
Manual (Manual Clock Set)  
Set the clock manually.  
1
Press </, to select the time zone for  
your area or GMT (Greenwich Mean  
Time), and press m.  
2
3
Select “On” using </, if you are now  
on summer time, and press ENTER.  
Set the day, month, year, hour, and  
minutes using </M/m/,, and press  
ENTER to start the clock.  
To change the numbers, press < to  
return to the item to be changed, and  
press M/m.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Input Line System  
HELP Setting  
Selects the colour system when recording  
from the connected equipment.  
On  
Off  
Displays Help information for  
GUI displays.  
NTSC  
Records in NTSC or PAL-60  
colour system.  
Does not set to HELP setting  
mode.  
PAL/  
SECAM  
Records in PAL or SECAM  
colour system.  
EPG Type Select  
b Notes  
• When picture noise appears after you change the  
“Input Line System” setting, change the “Input  
Colour System” setting (page 130). If picture  
noise still appears, hold down x (stop) on the  
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder.  
• When you change the “Input Line System”  
setting, the Dubbing List is erased.  
Selects the EPG (Electronic Programme  
Guide) type to use.  
The default setting varies depending on the  
country/region.  
GUIDE  
Plus+  
Select this to use the Gemstar  
GUIDE Plus+ electronic  
programme guide (page 61).  
Power Save  
Guide  
(Digital)  
Select this to use the digital  
electronic programme guide  
Selects whether this recorder is in power  
save mode when the power is turned off  
(standby).  
Easy Setup (Resetting the  
Recorder)  
Mode 1  
Only aerial input signals are  
output to the connected TV  
when the recorder is in  
standby.  
Select this to run the “Easy Setup”  
programme.  
Follow the instructions for “Easy Setup”  
(page 30) from step 2.  
Mode 2  
Off  
No input signals are output  
when the recorder is in  
standby.  
Does not set to power save  
mode. Normally, select this  
setting.  
b Note  
Power Save mode does not function in the  
following cases, even when “Power Save” is set to  
“Mode 1” or “Mode 2.”  
– There is a timer setting with “VPS / PDC” in the  
schedule list or Timer List.  
– The SMARTLINK features are not available  
when “Power Save” is set to “Mode 1” or “Mode  
2.”  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Channel Sort  
Aerial Reception  
After the programme positions have been  
set, you can change the order of each  
programme position in the displayed list.  
Settings (Digital Tuner)  
You can make digital tuner and programme  
position settings for the recorder.  
1
2
Press M/m to select a programme  
position you want to move, and press  
ENTER.  
• To display other pages, press M/m  
repeatedly.  
Replace Channels  
Scans available digital channels, and  
replaces all the channels already stored in  
the channel list with the scanned results.  
Select your country/region using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
The recorder scans available digital channels  
and stores them.  
To cancel the scan, press SYSTEM MENU  
or EXIT.  
Press M/m to select the programme  
position number to swap for the one  
selected in step 1, and press ENTER.  
The programme position numbers are  
swapped.  
• To move other programme positions,  
repeat from step 1.  
If any programme positions are unused or  
contain unwanted channels, you can disable  
Channel Options  
You can skip or lock certain channels.  
1
2
3
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
To set a password, see page 138.  
b Note  
The timer settings for the replaced channels are  
deleted.  
Select the programme position you want  
to skip or lock using M/m, and press  
ENTER.  
Add New Channels  
Scans digital channels and adds found  
channels to the channel list.  
Select an option, and press ENTER.  
• To skip the programme position, select  
.
• To lock the programme position,  
select  
.
A check mark appears in the check box  
next to the selected programme position.  
Auto Skip  
Selects whether to skip radio or data  
channels.  
Off  
No channels are skipped.  
Radio channels are skipped.  
Data channels are skipped.  
Radio  
Data  
Radio &  
Data  
Radio and data channels are  
skipped when selecting  
channels.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Signal Check  
Aerial Reception  
You can check the signal strength and  
quality of the channel.  
To scan a digital channel, select a channel  
using </,, and select “Add New  
Channels,” then press ENTER.  
Settings (Analog Tuner)  
You can make analogue tuner and  
programme position settings for the  
recorder.  
Aerial Power (RDR-HXD795/  
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095  
(except models for the UK)  
only)  
Auto Channel Setting  
Auto Scan  
If you connect a TV to this recorder not  
using SMARTLINK, you can preset  
programme positions automatically using  
“Auto Scan.”  
Select your country/region using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
Selects whether to supply the power to the  
aerial connected to the DIGITAL AERIAL  
IN jack.  
The programme position order will be set  
according to the country/region you set.  
If any programme positions are unused or  
contain unwanted channels, you can disable  
On  
The power is always supplied  
to the aerial connected to the  
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack.  
Auto  
The power is supplied to the  
aerial connected to the  
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack  
when the recorder is turned  
on.  
Download from TV  
If you connect a TV to this recorder with  
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme  
positions by downloading from your TV.  
For details, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with your TV.  
Select your country/region using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
The tuner preset data will be downloaded  
from your TV to this recorder.  
If any programme positions are unused or  
contain unwanted channels, you can disable  
Off  
The power is not supplied to  
the aerial connected to the  
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack.  
b Note  
When the aerial is not connected properly or is  
shorted, “Aerial Power” cannot be set to “On” or  
“Auto.” In this case, check the aerial connection  
D.TV Language  
Selects main and sub audio/subtitle  
languages or teletext language for bilingual  
programmes.  
,continued  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
CH System  
Select the region to get the best broadcast  
reception.  
Manual CH Setting  
Presets programme positions manually.  
If some programme positions could not be  
set using the “Easy Setup” function, you can  
set them manually.  
If there is no sound or if the picture is  
distorted, the wrong tuner system may have  
been preset during “Easy Setup.” Set the  
correct tuner system manually in the steps  
below.  
FR  
Select this when in France.  
Western  
Euro  
Select this when in West  
European countries.  
UK & IE  
Select this when in Great  
Britain/Ireland.  
Eastern  
Euro  
Select this when in East  
European countries.  
1
Select your country/region using </  
,, and press ENTER.  
Channel  
Press </, repeatedly until the  
Programme position  
programme position you want is displayed.  
• To select a cable or satellite programme  
position, press </, until the  
programme position you want is displayed.  
Receivable channels  
TV system  
Channel coverage  
BG (West European E2 – E12 VHF  
Countries, except  
Italian A – H VHF  
those listed below)  
2
3
Press PROG +/– to select the  
programme position.  
E21 – E69 UHF  
S1 – S20 CATV  
Select the item you want to change using  
M/m, and change the settings using </  
,, then press ENTER.  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
S01 – S05 CATV  
• To preset another programme position,  
repeat from step 2.  
DK (East European R1 – R12 VHF  
Countries)  
R21 – R69 UHF  
Skip  
S1 – S20 CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
S01 – S05 CATV  
On  
Select this when the  
programme position is unused  
or contains unwanted  
programme positions.  
The selected position will be  
skipped when you press  
PROG +/–.  
I (Great Britain/  
Ireland)  
Ireland A – J VHF  
South Africa 4 – 11, 13  
VHF  
B21 – B69 UHF  
S1 – S20 CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
S01 – S05 CATV  
F2 – F10 VHF  
Off  
Does not skip the selected  
programme position.  
L* (France)  
F21 – F69 UHF  
B – Q CATV  
S21 – S41 HYPER  
* To receive broadcasts in France, select “L.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
           
Tuning the French CATV channels  
This recorder can scan the CATV channels  
B to Q and the HYPER frequency channels  
S21 to S41. On the Channel Set menu, the  
channels are indicated as CC1 to CC44. For  
example, channel B is indicated by Channel  
Set number CC1, and channel Q is indicated  
by Channel Set number CC23 (see the table  
below). If the CATV channel you want to  
preset is indicated by its frequency (for  
example, 152.75 MHz), refer to the table  
below to find the corresponding channel  
number.  
Corre-  
sponding  
channel  
Channel  
Set  
number  
Receivable  
Frequency  
range (MHz)  
S25  
S26  
S27  
S28  
S29  
S30  
S31  
S32  
S33  
S34  
S35  
S36  
S37  
S38  
S39  
S40  
S41  
CC28  
CC29  
CC30  
CC31  
CC32  
CC33  
CC34  
CC35  
CC36  
CC37  
CC38  
CC39  
CC40  
CC41  
CC42  
CC43  
CC44  
331.25–339.25  
339.25–347.25  
347.25–355.25  
355.25–363.25  
363.25–371.25  
371.25–379.25  
379.25–387.25  
387.25–395.25  
395.25–403.25  
403.25–411.25  
411.25–419.25  
419.25–427.25  
427.25–435.25  
435.25–443.25  
443.25–451.25  
451.25–459.25  
459.25–467.25  
Corre-  
sponding  
channel  
Channel  
Set  
number  
Receivable  
Frequency  
range (MHz)  
B
C
CC1  
CC2  
116.75–124.75  
124.75–132.75  
132.75–140.75  
140.75–148.75  
148.75–156.75  
156.75–164.75  
164.75–172.75  
172.75–180.75  
180.75–188.75  
188.75–196.75  
196.75–204.75  
204.75–212.75  
212.75–220.75  
220.75–228.75  
228.75–236.75  
236.75–244.75  
244.75–252.75  
252.75–260.75  
260.75–268.75  
268.75–276.75  
276.75–284.75  
284.75–292.75  
292.75–300.75  
299.25–307.25  
307.25–315.25  
315.25–323.25  
323.25–331.25  
D
D
E
CC3  
CC4  
CC5  
F
CC6  
F
CC7  
G
H
H
I
CC8  
CC9  
AFT  
CC10  
CC11  
CC12  
CC13  
CC14  
CC15  
CC16  
CC17  
CC18  
CC19  
CC20  
CC21  
CC22  
CC23  
CC24  
CC25  
CC26  
CC27  
On  
Turns on the Auto Fine  
Tuning function.  
Normally select this position.  
J
J
Off  
Allows you to adjust the  
picture manually.  
K
L
• If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not  
work effectively, select “Off” and press m.  
Press </, to obtain a clearer picture,  
and press ENTER.  
L
M
N
N
O
P
P
Q
S21  
S22  
S23  
S24  
,continued  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sound System  
Select an available TV system (page 128).  
Video Settings (Video In/  
Out)  
B/G  
Select this when in West  
European countries, except  
those listed in “Receivable  
You can adjust items related to the image,  
such as size and colour, according to the type  
of TV, tuner, or decoder connected to the  
recorder.  
D/K  
I
Select this when in East  
European countries.  
Select this when in Great  
Britain/Ireland.  
Input Colour System  
L
Select this when in France.  
Selects the colour system when picture noise  
appears after you change the “Input Line  
System” setting (page 125).  
Name  
Changes or enters a new station name (up to  
5 characters). The recorder must receive  
programme position information (e.g.,  
SMARTLINK information) for station  
names to appear automatically.  
Auto  
Recorder automatically  
detects signals of colour  
systems and selects the  
appropriate colour system.  
Press ,, then press </, repeatedly to  
select a character.  
To change the characters, press M/m to  
move the cursor, and press </,.  
PAL  
Selects the PAL colour  
system when “Input Line  
System” is set to “PAL/  
SECAM.”  
SECAM  
Selects the SECAM colour  
system when “Input Line  
System” is set to “PAL/  
SECAM.”  
Decoder  
Sets the external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal  
Plus analogue decoder) channels.  
For details, see page 37.  
z Hint  
When “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC,” you  
can select “Auto,” “3.58NTSC,” or “PAL-60.”  
Channel Swapping  
After the programme positions have been  
set, you can change the order of each  
programme position in the display list.  
b Note  
“Input Colour System” cannot be set when  
viewing digital broadcasts.  
1
2
Press M/m to select the programme  
position number you want to swap, and  
press ,.  
• To display other pages, press ./  
> repeatedly.  
Component Video Out  
Selects the signal format in which the  
recorder outputs video signals: interlace or  
progressive, from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jacks.  
Press M/m to select the programme  
position number to swap for the one  
selected in step 1, and press ENTER.  
The programme position numbers are  
swapped.  
Normal(Inter- Outputs signals in the  
lace)  
interlace format.  
• To swap the programme position  
number of another station, repeat from  
step 1.  
Progressive  
Outputs signals in the  
progressive format. Select  
this when you want to view  
progressive signals.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
b Notes  
• When you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” you  
cannot set “Component Video Out.”  
• When you connect the recorder to a monitor or  
projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT jacks, do not set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB.”  
If you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” in this case,  
the picture may not appear.  
LINE 1 In  
Selects a method of inputting video signals  
for the LINE 1/DECODER jack. The picture  
will not be clear if this setting does not  
match the type of video input signal.  
• When picture noise appears after you set the  
recorder to progressive format, hold down x  
(stop) on the recorder, and press Z (open/close)  
on the recorder.  
• No video signals are output when using the  
HDMI connection.  
Video  
Inputs video signals.  
Inputs S-video signals.  
Inputs RGB signals.  
S-Video  
RGB  
Decoder  
Select this when  
connecting to an external  
decoder (PAY-TV/Canal  
Plus analogue decoder). If  
you connect to a cable box/  
satellite receiver such as  
CanalSat, do not select this  
option.  
LINE 3 Out  
Selects a method of outputting video signals  
for the LINE 3 – TV jack.  
Video  
S-Video  
RGB  
Outputs video signals.  
Outputs S-video signals.  
Outputs RGB signals.  
NTSC on PAL TV  
Sets the recorder to convert signals of the  
NTSC colour system to the PAL colour  
system to play NTSC discs on PAL-only  
TVs. Refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with your TV.  
b Notes  
• If your TV does not accept S-video or RGB  
signals, the image will not be displayed in the  
selected method on the TV screen even if you  
select “S-Video” or “RGB.” Refer to the  
instructions supplied with your TV.  
• SMARTLINK is available only when “Video” is  
selected.  
On  
Plays NTSC discs on PAL-  
only TVs.  
• RGB signals are not output when using the  
HDMI connection.  
Off  
Select this if the connected  
TV is a multi-system  
(NTSC-compatible) TV.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
b Note  
When receiving audio input signals from the DV  
input jack, the recorder automatically selects  
“Stereo” or “Bilingual” regardless of the “External  
Audio” setting.  
Audio Input Settings  
(Audio In)  
You can adjust the sound according to the  
playback and connection conditions.  
Bilingual Recording  
Selects the sound to be recorded.  
NICAM Select  
A/L  
Records the main sound  
for the bilingual  
programme.  
For details on NICAM system, see page 70.  
NICAM  
Normally select this  
position.  
B/R  
Records the sub sound  
for the bilingual  
programme.  
Standard  
Select this if the sound  
from NICAM broadcasts is  
not clear.  
b Notes  
• When recording a bilingual audio signal to the  
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to  
“Video Mode Off” (page 137) (except in PCM  
mode)) or a DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode  
(except in PCM mode), both audio channels are  
recorded and you can select the sound when  
playing.  
Analog Tuner Level  
If the playback sound is distorted, set this  
item to “Compression.” The recorder  
reduces the audio output level.  
This function affects the output of the  
following jacks:  
• Bilingual audio streams cannot be recorded  
simultaneously from digital broadcasts.  
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks  
– LINE 3 – TV jack  
– LINE 1/DECODER jack  
DV Input  
Select the setting for the audio input when  
DV camcorder dubbing.  
Normal  
Normally select this  
position.  
Select “Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)”/“Mix (Stereo  
1: 50 %)”/“Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)” or “Stereo  
2” only if you have added a second audio  
when recording with your digital video  
camera.  
Compression Select this when the  
playback sound from the  
speakers is distorted.  
Stereo 1  
Records original  
sound only.  
External Audio  
Normally select  
this when dubbing  
a DV format tape.  
Stereo  
Select this when  
receiving stereo  
programmes from  
connected equipment.  
Stereo 2  
Records additional  
audio only.  
Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)  
Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)  
Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)  
Bilingual  
Select this when  
receiving bilingual  
programmes from  
connected equipment.  
Records both stereo  
1 and 2.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
b Note  
When HDMI output is performed to equipment not  
compatible with DTS signals, the signals will not  
be output regardless of the “DTS Output” setting.  
Audio Output Settings  
(Audio Out)  
You can switch the method of outputting  
audio signals when you connect a  
component such as an amplifier (receiver)  
with a digital input jack.  
96 kHz PCM Output (DVD  
VIDEOs only)  
Selects the sampling frequency of the audio  
signal.  
b Note  
If you connect a component that does not accept  
the selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no  
sound) will come from the speakers, and may  
affect your ears or cause speaker damage.  
96 kHz ->  
48 kHz  
The audio signals of DVD  
VIDEOs are converted to  
48 kHz and output.  
96 kHz  
All signals containing  
96 kHz are output without  
conversion. However, the  
signals are output at  
48 kHz if copyright-  
protected signals are  
contained.  
Dolby Digital Output (HDD/  
DVDs only)  
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.  
Dolby Digital Select this when the  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component with a  
built-in Dolby Digital  
decoder.  
b Notes  
• “96 kHz PCM Output” setting has no effect  
when audio signals are output from the LINE 2  
OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks or LINE 3 – TV/LINE  
1/DECODER jack. If the sampling frequency is  
96 kHz, signals are simply converted to  
analogue signals and output.  
Dolby Digital Select this when the  
-> PCM  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component lacking a  
built-in Dolby Digital  
decoder.  
• If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to  
equipment not compatible with 96 kHz signals,  
48 kHz PCM will be automatically output even  
when you select “96 kHz.”  
b Note  
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment  
not compatible with Dolby Digital signals, the  
PCM signals will be automatically output even  
when you select “Dolby Digital.”  
MPEG Output (DVD VIDEOs  
only)  
Selects the type of MPEG audio signal.  
DTS Output (DVD VIDEOs only)  
MPEG  
Select this when the  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component with a  
built-in MPEG decoder.  
Selects whether or not to output DTS  
signals.  
On  
Select this when the  
MPEG ->  
PCM  
Select this when the  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component with a  
built-in DTS decoder.  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component without a  
built-in MPEG decoder. If  
you play MPEG audio  
sound tracks, the recorder  
outputs stereo signals via  
the DIGITAL OUT  
Off  
Select this when the  
recorder is connected to an  
audio component without a  
built-in DTS decoder.  
(COAXIAL) jack.  
,continued  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b Note  
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment  
not compatible with MPEG audio signals, the  
PCM signals will be automatically output even  
when you select “MPEG.”  
Language Settings  
(Language)  
You can make language settings.  
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range  
Control) (DVDs only)  
OSD Language  
Selects the dynamic range (difference  
between soft and loud sounds) setting when  
playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio  
DRC.” This affects the output from the  
following jacks:  
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks  
– LINE 3 – TV jack  
– LINE 1/DECODER jack  
Switches the display language on the screen.  
Audio Language (DVD VIDEO  
only)  
Switches the language of the sound track.  
– DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT  
jack only when “Dolby Digital Output” is  
set to “Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 133).  
Subtitle Language (DVD VIDEO  
only)  
On  
Makes low sounds clear  
even if you turn the volume  
down.  
Switches the language of the subtitles  
recorded on the disc.  
Off  
Normally select this  
position.  
Auto Language  
The “Auto Language” function is available  
when “Audio Language” and “Subtitle  
Language” are set to the same language, and  
“Subtitle Display” is set to “On.”  
On  
For DVD VIDEOs whose  
main audio track is the  
language you set in “Audio  
Language” and “Subtitle  
Language,” the recorder  
plays the main audio track  
without subtitles.  
For DVD VIDEOs whose  
main audio track is not the  
language you set in “Audio  
Language” and “Subtitle  
Language,” the recorder  
plays the main audio track  
with subtitles in the  
language you set.  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DVD Menu Language (DVD  
VIDEO only)  
Recording Settings  
(Recording)  
Switches the language for the DVD menu.  
Select “w/Subtitle Language” to set the  
same language as the language you set in  
“Subtitle Language.”  
You can adjust recording settings.  
Manual Rec. Mode  
Subtitle Display  
You can select further options for recording  
mode (manual recording mode). The default  
setting is “Off” (standard recording mode).  
You can check the approximate recording  
times for the HDD and the different DVD  
types in each recording mode on page 155.  
On  
Off  
Displays subtitles.  
Does not display subtitles.  
1
Select “On (go to setup)” using M/m,  
and press ENTER.  
Assist Subtitle Displays special assistive  
subtitles, where available.  
2
Select a recording mode using </,,  
and press ENTER.  
To easily select a manual recording  
mode, press REC MODE repeatedly to  
display “MN,” and select a manual  
recording mode using </,.  
z Hint  
If you select “Others” in “Audio Language,”  
“Subtitle Language,” or “DVD Menu Language,”  
press m, and enter a language code from  
b Note  
If you select a language in “DVD Menu  
Language,” “Subtitle Language,” or “Audio  
Language” that is not recorded on the DVD  
VIDEO, one of the recorded languages will be  
automatically selected.  
Rec. Mode Adjust  
On  
Automatically adjusts the  
recording mode to enable  
the entire programme to be  
recorded (page 68).  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
Subtitle Recording  
On  
Off  
Records digital broadcast  
subtitles.  
No digital broadcast  
subtitles are recorded.  
,continued  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Set Thumbnail  
Auto Chapter (Video) (DVD-RW/  
DVD-R in Video mode only)  
Selects a scene for the thumbnail picture  
shown in the Title List.  
No  
Separation  
No chapter mark is  
inserted.  
0 seconds  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
The first frame of the title  
is set for the thumbnail  
picture.  
10 minutes  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 10-minute  
intervals.  
The frame at 30 seconds  
from the first frame is set  
for the thumbnail picture.  
15 minutes  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 15-minute  
intervals.  
The frame at 3 minutes  
from the first frame is set  
for the thumbnail picture.  
Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)  
(DVD+RW/DVD+R only)  
Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) (HDD/  
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode  
only)  
No  
No chapter mark is  
inserted.  
Separation  
10 minutes  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 10-minute  
intervals.  
On  
The recorder detects  
changes in the picture and  
sound and automatically  
inserts chapter marks (up  
to 99 chapters for one title  
recorded on the HDD).  
15 minutes  
Inserts chapter marks at  
approximately 15-minute  
intervals.  
Off  
No chapter mark is  
inserted.  
b Notes  
• The actual chapter mark interval may vary  
depending on the amount of information  
contained in the video to be recorded.  
• Chapter marks are automatically inserted, where  
the date or time information changes on the tape,  
when “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On”  
during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD-RW/  
DVD-R (VR mode).  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
HDD Recording Format  
Playback Settings  
(Playback)  
Selects the HDD recording format.  
Video Mode  
Off  
Records to the HDD in VR  
mode.  
You can adjust playback settings.  
When recording stereo and  
bilingual programmes,  
both main and sub sounds  
can be recorded.  
TV Type  
Select the playback picture size according to  
the type of connected TV (wide-screen/wide  
mode TV or conventional 4:3 screen TV).  
Video Mode  
On  
Records to the HDD in  
Video mode.  
When recording stereo and  
bilingual programmes,  
only one sound track (main  
or sub) can be recorded.  
Set “Bilingual Recording”  
to “A/L” (default) or “B/R”  
in the “Audio In” setup  
4:3 Letter Box Select this when  
connecting to a 4:3 screen  
TV. Displays a wide  
picture with bands on the  
upper and lower portions  
of the screen.  
4:3 Pan Scan Select this when  
connecting to a 4:3 screen  
TV. Automatically  
z Hint  
The HDD contents recorded in Video mode can be  
displays a wide picture on  
the entire screen and cuts  
off the portions that do not  
fit.  
dubbed to a disc at high speed (page 89).  
b Note  
Bilingual audio streams cannot be recorded  
simultaneously from digital broadcasts.  
16:9  
Select this when  
connecting to a wide-  
screen TV or TV with a  
wide mode function.  
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Pan Scan  
16:9  
b Note  
Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be  
selected automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan”  
or vice-versa.  
,continued  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Pause Mode  
Limitation Settings  
(Parental Lock)  
Selects the picture quality in pause mode.  
Field  
Frame  
Auto  
Outputs a stable, generally  
shake-free image.  
You can set the password and limit the  
operations.  
Outputs a sharp image, but  
may be prone to shake.  
Set Password/Change  
Password  
Outputs a generally less  
sharp but more stable still  
image.  
You can set or change password that gives  
access to the “Channel Options” settings in  
the “Digital Tuner” setup and the “Parental  
Lock” settings.  
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
To change the password, enter your four-  
digit password in the “Current Password”  
row using the number buttons, and press  
ENTER. Then enter a new password in the  
“New Password” row using the number  
buttons.  
Seamless Playback (HDD/  
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode  
only)  
On  
Playback is smooth, but  
with a trade-off against the  
accuracy of the edit points.  
Off  
You may notice  
The password setting/password changing  
setting is completed.  
momentary interruption at  
edited points during  
playback of a VR mode  
Playlist.  
b Note  
If you forgot your password, reset the recorder  
Angle Indicator (DVD VIDEOs  
only)  
DVD Playback (DVD VIDEO  
only)  
On  
Displays “  
” on the TV  
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be  
limited according to a predetermined level,  
such as the age of the users. Scenes may be  
blocked or replaced with different scenes.  
screen if various angles  
(multi-angles) for a scene  
are recorded on the disc.  
1
Select “Standard,” and press ENTER.  
Off  
Does not display “  
the TV screen.  
” on  
2
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3
Select “Code” (geographic area) as the  
playback limitation level, and press  
ENTER.  
HDMI Settings (HDMI  
Output)  
The area is selected.  
• When you select “Number,” press the  
number buttons to select and enter a  
country/area code in the table  
(page 158), and press ENTER.  
You can adjust items related to the HDMI  
connection.  
b Note  
4
5
6
Select “Change Level,” and press  
ENTER.  
You can select “HDMI Output” only when  
connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT jack.  
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
Screen Resolution  
Select the level.  
The lower the value, the stricter the  
limitation.  
Discs rated higher than the selected  
level will be restricted.  
Selects the type of video signals output from  
the HDMI OUT jack. If the picture is not  
clear, natural or to your satisfaction, try  
another option that suits the disc and your  
TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also to  
the instruction manual supplied with the TV/  
projector, etc.  
7
Press ENTER.  
The DVD Playback setting is  
completed.  
To cancel the DVD Playback setting for  
the disc, select “Off” in step 6.  
1920 x 1080p Sends 1920×1080p video  
signals.  
1920 x 1080i Sends 1920×1080i video  
D.TV Age Limit  
signals.  
Viewing of some digital TV programmes  
can be limited according to the age limit you  
set. To watch programmes that exceed the  
age limit you set, your password is required.  
When recording a locked programme, the  
“D.TV Age Limit” setting is automatically  
cancelled and the programme can be viewed.  
In addition, you can watch the recorded title  
without having to enter a password.  
1280 x 720p  
Sends 1280×720p video  
signals.  
*1  
720 x 576p  
720 x 480p  
Sends 720×576p video  
signals.  
*2  
Sends 720×480p video  
signals.  
*1  
720 x 576i  
720 x 480i  
Sends 720×576i video  
signals.  
(for customers in France/Denmark/Finland,  
or Sweden only)  
*2  
Sends 720×480i video  
signals.  
1
2
Enter your four-digit password using the  
number buttons, and press ENTER.  
Select an age as limitation level, and  
press ENTER.  
*1  
*2  
Can be selected only when “Input Line System”  
is set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup  
Can be selected only when “Input Line System”  
is set to “NTSC” in the “Basic” setup  
The setting is completed.  
To cancel the setting, select “Off.”  
,continued  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
b Notes  
YCbCr 4:2:2  
YCbCr 4:4:4  
Outputs 10-bit YCbCr  
4:2:2 component signals.  
• When picture noise appears after you change the  
“Screen Resolution” setting, hold down x (stop)  
on the recorder, and press Z (open/close) on the  
recorder.  
Outputs 8-bit YCbCr  
4:4:4 component signals.  
• When “Colour” is set to “YCbCr 4:2:2” in the  
“HDMI Output” setup, you cannot select “720 x  
576i” (or “720 x 480i”).  
b Notes  
• Some settings may not be available depending  
on the connected device.  
• When a DVI device is connected, you cannot  
select “YCbCr 4:2:2” or “YCbCr 4:4:4.”  
• When “Screen Resolution” is set to “720 x 576i”  
(or “720 x 480i”) in the “HDMI Output” setup,  
you cannot select “YCbCr 4:2:2.”  
4:3 Video Output  
This setting is effective only when you set  
“TV Type” to “16:9” in the “Playback”  
setup.  
Adjust this setting to watch 4:3 aspect ratio  
signals. If you can change the aspect ratio on  
your TV, change the setting on your TV, not  
this recorder.  
Note that this setting is effective only for  
HDMI connection.  
Audio Output  
Selects the type of audio signal output from  
the HDMI OUT jack.  
Auto  
Outputs Dolby Digital,  
MPEG and DTS audio  
signals as a bitstream  
signal. Normally select  
this position.  
Full  
Select this when you can  
change the aspect ratio on  
your TV.  
Normal  
Select this when you  
cannot change the aspect  
ratio on your TV. Shows a  
4:3 size video with the  
aspect ratio as it is.  
PCM  
Converts all audio  
signals except for DTS  
signals to PCM.  
Bitstream  
Priority  
Select this if the  
connected device is  
compatible with  
bitstream audio.  
b Notes  
16:9 aspect ratio TV  
• The PCM signals may not be output even when  
you select “Auto” depending on the “Audio Out”  
settings, number of audio channels, and the  
HDMI-connected device.  
• The “Audio Output” function is not available  
when a DVI device is connected.  
Colour  
Selects the method of outputting video  
signals for the HDMI jack.  
RGB (0-255)  
Outputs RGB (0-255)  
signals. Select this when  
connecting to an RGB (0-  
255) device.  
Control for HDMI  
On  
Allows you to use the  
“Control for HDMI”  
function (page 24).  
RGB (16-235)  
Outputs RGB (16-235)  
signals. Select this if  
colours appear overly  
rich and the black  
Off  
Turns off the function.  
appears too deep.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
Set the Command Mode for the remote  
so it matches the Command Mode for  
the recorder you set above.  
Other Settings (Options)  
Follow the steps below to set the  
Command Mode on the remote.  
1 Hold down ENTER.  
You can make other operation settings.  
2 While holding down ENTER, enter  
the Command Mode code number  
using the number buttons.  
On Screen Display  
3 Hold down both the number and  
ENTER buttons at the same time for  
more than three seconds.  
On  
Automatically displays  
information on the screen  
when the recorder is turned  
on, etc.  
z Hint  
You can check the Command Mode for the  
recorder in the front panel display (page 15).  
When the Command Mode is set to “3 (Default  
setting),” “1” or “2” does not appear.  
Off  
Displays information only  
when DISPLAY is  
pressed.  
Front Panel Display  
SMARTLINK  
Adjusts the lighting of the front panel  
display.  
ThisRecorder Allows you to use the  
Only  
SMARTLINK function  
with the recorder when the  
recorder is in standby  
mode.  
On  
Off  
Bright lighting.  
Turns off the lighting when  
the power is off.  
Pass Through Allows you to use the  
SMARTLINK function  
with the connected  
Command Mode  
equipment when the  
recorder is in standby  
mode.  
Changes the Command Mode of the  
recorder to avoid interference with your  
other Sony DVD recorder or player.  
b Note  
1
Select a Command Mode (“1,” “2,” or  
“3 (Default setting)”), and press  
ENTER.  
Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the “Basic” setup  
(page 125) to set “SMARTLINK” to “Pass  
Through.”  
b Note  
The default command mode setting for this  
recorder and the supplied remote is “3  
(Default setting).”  
The remote does not function if different  
command modes are set for the recorder and  
remote. Set the same command mode.  
DivX  
Registration Code  
Displays the registration code of DivX video  
files for this recorder.  
For more information, go to http://  
www.divx.com/vod on the Internet.  
,continued  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Set Preview (HDD only)  
Other Settings  
(Options 2)  
Selects the thumbnail type shown in the Title  
List.  
You can make other operation settings.  
Quick  
Preview  
Plays short excerpts from  
throughout the selected  
title.  
USB  
Normal  
Plays the selected title  
from the beginning.  
Restart USB Device  
Restarts the connected USB device if it does  
not respond to the recorder. If the connected  
USB device still does not work properly, try  
following:  
– Turn the connected USB device off and on  
again.  
CI Information (RDR-HXD795/  
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095  
only)  
– Disconnect and then connect the USB  
cable.  
You can see the CI information. The  
displayed information differs depending on  
the CI module.  
Confirm Printer  
Displays the manufacturer and model name  
of the printer connected to the recorder. Note  
that this function may not work depending  
on the printer.  
Software Update  
You can check the current software version  
of the built-in digital tuner and keep it up to  
date with the latest software.  
TV Pause  
Manual Update  
Selects the tuner for the TV Pause (page 79).  
Updates the software manually.  
To cancel, press SYSTEM MENU.  
The new software will be available next time  
the recorder is turned on.  
TV’s Tuner  
Selects this when  
connecting the recorder to  
your TV using the SCART  
jack.  
Auto Update  
Recorder’s  
Tuner  
Selects this when  
connecting the recorder to  
your TV not using the  
SCART jack.  
On  
Updates the software  
automatically. Normally,  
select this position.  
Off  
Does not update the  
software automatically.  
Technical Info.  
You can check the current hardware and  
software versions of the digital tuner.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
, If you connect the recorder to your TV via  
only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
jacks, set “Component Video Out” in the  
“Video In/Out” setup to “Progressive”  
, (For RDR-HXD790/HXD890/HXD990/  
HXD1090) A scrambled channel is  
selected.  
, (For RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/  
HXD1095) A scrambled channel is  
selected. Insert the proper CAM (page 26).  
, A HD (High Definition) programme is  
selected.  
Additional Information  
Troubleshooting  
If you experience any of the following  
difficulties while using the recorder, use this  
troubleshooting guide to help remedy the  
problem before requesting repairs. Should  
any problem persist, consult your nearest  
Sony dealer.  
, A radio channel is selected.  
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the  
video and audio may be momentarily  
interrupted at the point where the layers  
switch.  
Power  
The power does not turn on.  
, Check that the mains lead is connected  
securely.  
Picture noise appears.  
, If the picture output signal from your  
recorder passes through your VCR to get to  
your TV, or if you are connected to a  
combination TV/VIDEO player, the copy-  
protection signal applied to some DVD  
programmes could affect picture quality. If  
you still experience this problem even  
when you connect your recorder directly to  
your TV, try connecting your recorder to  
your TV’s S VIDEO input.  
, You have set the recorder to progressive  
format even though your TV cannot accept  
the progressive signal. In this case, hold  
down x (stop) on the recorder, and press  
Z (open/close) on the recorder.  
The power of the recorder turns off at the  
same time as the TV is turned off.  
, This is caused by the ‘BRAVIA’ Sync  
features. Set “Control for HDMI” to “Off”  
in the “HDMI Output” setup to cancel this  
Tuner  
The channel is not found or stored or  
missed.  
, Make sure that your aerial is properly  
connected to the recorder.  
, Even if your TV is compatible with  
progressive format (525p/625p) signals,  
the image may be affected when you set  
the recorder to progressive format. In this  
case, hold down x (stop) on the recorder,  
and press Z (open/close) on the unit and  
the recorder is set to normal (interlace)  
format.  
, You are playing a title recorded in a colour  
system that is different from your TV.  
, Noise may appear in the pictures recorded  
on the HDD, which is due to the  
characteristics of HDD, and is not a  
malfunction.  
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the  
video and audio may be momentarily  
interrupted at the point where the layers  
switch.  
, Confirm with your dealer that you are in an  
area that can receive a digital signal.  
, Check your aerial installation.  
Picture  
There is no picture.  
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely.  
, The connecting cords are damaged.  
, Check the connection to your TV  
, Switch the input selector on your TV (such  
as to “VCR” and “AV 1”) so that the signal  
from the recorder appears on the TV  
screen.  
, Check that the “Video In/Out” setup is set  
to the appropriate item that conforms to  
your system (page 130).  
,continued  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart.  
, Place the TV and any bunched aerial  
cables farther apart.  
, The aerial cable is connected to the  
AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder.  
Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack.  
, The recorder’s colour system is different  
from your TV. Hold down x (stop) on the  
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder  
to change the recorder’s colour system.  
There is no picture or picture noise  
appears when connected to the DV IN  
jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the i.LINK cable again.  
There is no picture or picture noise appears  
when connected to the HDMI OUT jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the HDMI cord again.  
, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video  
output, changing the “Screen Resolution”  
setting in the “HDMI Output” setup may  
solve the problem (page 139). Connect the  
TV and the recorder using a video jack  
other than HDMI OUT, and switch the  
TV’s input to the connected video input so  
that you can see the on-screen displays.  
Change the “Screen Resolution” setting in  
the “HDMI Output” setup, and switch the  
TV’s input back to HDMI. If the picture  
still does not appear, repeat the steps and  
try other options.  
TV channels cannot be changed.  
, A timer recording started, which changed  
the channels.  
, The channel is skipped (page 128).  
, The Parental Lock is activated (page 138).  
The picture from equipment connected to  
the recorder’s input jack does not appear  
on the screen.  
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE  
1/DECODER jack, select “L1” in the front  
panel display by pressing INPUT.  
If the equipment is connected to the LINE  
2 IN jacks, select “L2” in the front panel  
display by pressing INPUT.  
, The recorder is connected to an input  
device that is not HDCP compliant  
The playback picture or TV programme  
from the equipment connected through  
the recorder is distorted.  
, If the playback picture output from a DVD  
player, VCR, or tuner goes through your  
recorder before reaching your TV, the  
copy-protection signal applied to some  
programmes could affect picture quality.  
Disconnect the playback equipment in  
question and connect it directly to your  
TV.  
, When picture noise appears after you  
change the “Screen Resolution” setting,  
hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and  
press Z (open/close) on the recorder.  
TV programme reception does not fill the  
screen.  
, Set the channel manually in “Manual CH  
Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup  
, Select the correct source using the INPUT  
button, or select a channel of any TV  
programme using the PROG +/– buttons.  
The picture does not fill the screen.  
, Set “TV Type” in the “Playback” setup in  
accordance with the screen size of your TV  
The picture is breaking up.  
, The signal strength is low.  
, Check aerial installation.  
The picture does not fill the screen, even  
though the picture size is set in “TV  
Type” in the “Playback” setup.  
, The picture size of the title is fixed.  
TV programme pictures are distorted.  
, Reorient the TV aerial.  
, Adjust the picture (refer to the TV’s  
instruction manual).  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, If the host channel has changed or moved,  
the programme guide data cannot be  
received. In this case, follow the steps in  
host channel setting. If the problem  
persists after waiting for one day, search  
for the host channel at the following  
website and set the host channel manually  
The picture is black and white.  
, Check that “LINE 3 Out” in the “Video In/  
Out” setup is set to the appropriate item  
that conforms to your system (page 131).  
, If you are using a SCART cord, be sure to  
use one that is fully wired (21 pins).  
GUIDE Plus+ system (in areas  
with GUIDE Plus+ only)  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
GUIDE Plus+ system does not appear.  
, 1Even if you complete “Easy Setup,” TV  
programme listings do not appear until the  
recorder receives the GUIDE Plus+ data.  
2Turn off the recorder, but do not unplug  
it. 3Wait for 24 hours. It may take several  
days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE  
Plus+ data for all programme positions. If  
the recorder does not receive the GUIDE  
Plus+ data after 24 hours, set the host  
channel manually (page 64).  
, The host channel is disabled. Show and  
enable the host channel (page 65).  
, The timer is set. Cancel the timer setting.  
, The clock is incorrect. Set the clock  
The programme position number in the  
programme listing does not match the  
broadcast station.  
,
There may be more than one channel lineup  
for your area. To change the channel lineup,  
select “Editor” in the Menu Bar of the  
GUIDE Plus+ system (page 65).  
Programme listings for some programme  
positions are missing.  
, The programme guide data may not be  
updated. Turn off the recorder and let the  
recorder receive the programme guide  
data.  
, Some broadcast stations support only two  
days of data. For details, refer to the  
following website:  
, The country/region or postal code is  
incorrect. Correctly set your country/  
region and postal code (page 30).  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
, When the recorder is connected to a set top  
box receiver, the set top box receiver must  
be turned on to download the GUIDE  
Plus+ data.  
, If the set top box receiver is connected to  
the recorder using a SCART cord only, try  
the following: 1Turn on your set top box  
receiver. 2Connect the set top box  
controller. 3Follow the steps in  
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be  
received because the reception is poor.  
The programme listing is not up to date.  
, The recorder was in use during the time  
that the GUIDE Plus+ data was scheduled  
to be downloaded.  
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be  
received because the reception is poor.  
channel manually. Be sure to set your set  
top box receiver (tuner) as the source.  
, Area numbers that cannot be received  
using GUIDE Plus+ are set. Select “Easy  
Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial  
Setup” in the System Menu, and follow the  
on-screen instructions to make the settings  
again (page 30).  
Sound  
There is no sound.  
, Re-connect all connections securely.  
, The connecting cord is damaged.  
, The input source setting on the audio  
component or the connection to the audio  
component is incorrect.  
, The “Time Lock” function on your cable  
box is activated. Set this function to off.  
, The recorder is in reverse play, fast-  
forward, slow motion, or pause mode.  
,continued  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, If the audio signal does not come through  
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI  
OUT jacks, check the “Audio Out” setup  
, The recorder supports only MP3 audio,  
Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for DivX  
video files. Press AUDIO and select MP3  
audio or MPEG audio.  
, Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot  
be recorded on the HDD (when Video  
Mode On), DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs  
(Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs  
(Video mode). To record the language, set  
“Bilingual Recording” in the “Audio In”  
setup to “A/L” or “B/R” before recording  
(page 132). To record both the main and  
sub sounds on a disc, record on DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode). To record on  
the HDD, set “HDD Recording Format” to  
“Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”  
No sound is output from the HDMI OUT  
jack.  
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off  
and on again. 2Turn the connected  
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect  
and then connect the HDMI cord again.  
, The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a  
DVI device (DVI jacks do not accept audio  
signals).  
, The equipment connected to the HDMI  
OUT jack does not conform to the audio  
signal format. In this case, set “Audio  
Output” to “PCM” in the “HDMI Output”  
, If you have connected an audio component  
to the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack  
and want to change the audio track for the  
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is  
set to “Video Mode Off” in the  
“Recording” setup (page 137))/DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) during  
playback, set “Dolby Digital Output” in  
the “Audio Out” setup to “Dolby Digital ->  
PCM” (page 133).  
, Bilingual audio streams cannot be  
recorded simultaneously from digital  
broadcasts.  
Sound distortion occurs.  
, Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio  
In” setup to “Compression” (page 132).  
The sound is breaking up.  
, The signal strength is low.  
, Check aerial installation.  
Sound is noisy.  
, When playing a CD with DTS sound  
tracks, noise will come from the LINE 2  
OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks, LINE 3 – TV  
jack, or LINE 1/DECODER jack  
Recording/Timer recording/  
Editing  
The programme position cannot be  
changed from the programme position  
you are recording.  
The sound volume is low.  
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.  
The sound volume may improve if you set  
“Audio DRC” in the “Audio Out” setup to  
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”  
Recording does not start immediately  
after you press z REC.  
, Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio  
In” setup to “Normal” (page 132).  
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”  
“FORMAT,” or “INFO WRITE”  
An alternate audio track cannot be  
recorded or played.  
disappears from the front panel display.  
, When recording from connected  
equipment, set “External Audio” to  
“Bilingual” in the “Audio In” setup  
Nothing was recorded even though you  
set the timer setting correctly.  
, There was a power failure during  
recording.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due  
to a power failure that lasted for more than  
1 hour. Reset the clock (page 124).  
, The channel was disabled after the timer  
recording was set. See “Manual CH  
, The programme position was hidden after  
the timer recording was set. (See  
, Disconnect the mains lead from the mains,  
and connect it again.  
, The programme contains copy protection  
signals that restrict copying.  
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer  
setting (page 59, 72).  
, There is no DVD inside the recorder.  
, There is not enough disc space for the  
recording.  
Contents previously recorded were  
erased.  
, Data that is not playable on this recorder  
but was recorded on a DVD with a PC will  
be erased from the disc when the disc is  
inserted.  
The VPS/PDC function does not operate.  
, Check that the clock and date are set  
correctly.  
, Check that the VPS/PDC time you set is  
correct (there might be a mistake in the TV  
programme guide). If the broadcast you  
wanted to record did not send the correct  
VPS/PDC information, the recorder will  
not start recording.  
, If the reception is poor, the VPS/PDC  
signal might be altered and the recorder  
might not start recording.  
, The VPS/PDC function may not work if  
the GUIDE Plus+ host channel setup is not  
complete.  
, The set top box receiver was turned off.  
, The set top box controller was incorrectly  
connected (page 18).  
, The settings in “Setup” in the Menu bar  
have been changed (page 64).  
, The VPS/PDC function does not work  
when the GUIDE Plus+ data is being  
downloaded.  
, The recorder was in the process of  
dubbing.  
, A scrambled channel is selected.  
Playback  
Recording does not stop immediately  
after you press x REC STOP.  
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder  
to input disc data before recording can  
stop.  
The recorder does not play any type of  
disc (except HDD).  
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc  
with the labelled side facing up.  
, The disc is not correctly inserted.  
, Moisture has condensed inside the  
recorder. In this case, if the recorder is on,  
leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about  
an hour until the moisture evaporates.  
, If the disc was recorded on another  
recorder and was not finalised (page 46),  
the recorder cannot play the disc.  
On-screen instructions may appear after  
pressing x REC STOP. In this case,  
follow the on-screen instructions.  
Recording does not stop after you press  
x.  
, Press x REC STOP.  
Timer recording is not complete or did  
not start from the beginning.  
, There was a power failure during  
recording. If the power recovers when  
there is a timer recording, the recorder  
resumes recording.  
Should the power failure continue for more  
than 1 hour, reset the clock (page 124).  
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer  
setting (page 59, 72).  
The recorder does not start playback from  
the beginning.  
, Resume play was activated (page 74).  
, You have inserted a DVD whose Title  
menu or DVD menu automatically appears  
on the TV screen when it is first inserted.  
Use the menu to start playback.  
, Disc space was not sufficient.  
, The VPS/PDC function is working.  
,continued  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles  
recorded on this recorder.  
, The angles cannot be changed during slow  
motion playback or when playback is  
paused.  
The recorder starts playing  
automatically.  
, The DVD VIDEO features an auto  
playback function.  
Playback stops automatically.  
, If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the  
recorder stops playback at the auto pause  
signal.  
The DivX video files do not play.  
, The file is not created in DivX format.  
, The file has an extension other than “.avi”  
or “.divx.”  
, The DATA CD (DivX video)/DATA DVD  
(DivX video) is not created in a DivX  
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/  
Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or UDF (Universal  
Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, 2.00, or 2.01.  
, The DivX video file format is larger than  
720 (width) × 576 (height).  
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or  
Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.  
, Depending on the DVD, you may not be  
able to do some of the operations above.  
Refer to the instruction manual supplied  
with the disc.  
The MP3 audio tracks do not play.  
, The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a  
format that the recorder can play  
The language for the sound track cannot  
be changed.  
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the  
DVD being played.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing  
of the language for the sound track.  
, Try changing the language using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
The JPEG image files do not play.  
, The JPEG image files are not recorded in a  
format that the recorder can play  
, Progressive JPEG images cannot be  
played.  
The subtitle language cannot be changed  
or turned off.  
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on  
the DVD VIDEO.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of  
the subtitles.  
TV Pause does not work.  
, You are recording to the HDD or the HDD  
is full.  
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the  
titles recorded on this recorder.  
Dubbing  
You dubbed a title, but the title did not  
appear in the HDD Title List.  
, The title contained a copy protection  
signal, so it was moved (page 157).  
The angles cannot be changed.  
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD  
VIDEO being played.  
, You are trying to change the angles when  
” does not appear on the TV screen  
High-speed dubbing is not possible.  
, The title cannot be dubbed at high speed  
(page 91). Even if A-B erasure is  
(page 75). To display “ ” if various  
angles (multi-angles) for a scene are  
recorded on the disc, set “Angle Indicator”  
to “On” in the “Playback” setup  
performed so that a title does not contain  
mixed picture sizes, it is still treated as a  
title with mixed picture sizes.  
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing  
angles.  
, Try changing the angle using the DVD  
VIDEO’s menu.  
HDD/DVD Dubbing is not possible.  
, The title cannot be dubbed (page 90).  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDD camcorder dubbing is not possible.  
, An HDD camcorder which is not  
supported by this recorder is connected  
, The HDD camcorder is not set to the USB  
connection mode (page 95).  
, The HDD camcorder contains only the  
contents that have already been dubbed to  
the recorder when you are dubbing using  
the ONE-TOUCH DUB button or  
“Incremental Dubbing.”  
Remote control  
The remote does not function.  
, Different command modes are set for the  
recorder and remote. Set the same  
command mode (page 141). The default  
command mode setting for this recorder  
and the supplied remote is “3 (Default  
setting).” You can check the current  
command mode in the front panel display  
, The batteries are weak.  
, The remote is too far from the recorder.  
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned  
to the default setting when you replaced  
the batteries. Reset the code (page 28).  
, The remote is not pointed at the remote  
sensor on the recorder.  
Display  
The clock has stopped.  
, Set the clock again (page 124).  
The clock is wrong.  
, Set the clock again (page 124). If you  
cannot set the clock, wait until the clock  
data is received and the clock is  
automatically adjusted.  
Others  
The recorder does not detect a USB  
device connected to the recorder.  
, Make sure that the USB device is securely  
connected to the recorder (page 142).  
, Check if the USB device or a cable is  
damaged.  
The timer indicator is flashing.  
, The disc does not have enough space.  
, Insert a recordable disc into the recorder.  
, The inserted DVD is protected (page 45).  
, Check if the USB device is on.  
, The USB device is connected via a USB  
hub. Connect the USB device directly to  
the recorder.  
The clock does not appear in the front  
panel display when the recorder is turned  
off.  
, “Front Panel Display” is set to “Off” in the  
“Options” setup (page 141).  
Display language on the screen switches  
automatically.  
, When “Control for HDMI” is set to “On”  
(default) in the “HDMI Output” setup  
(page 140), the display language on the  
screen automatically switches, according  
to the language setting of the connected  
TV, if you change the language settings on  
your TV, etc.  
The title or station name is not correctly  
displayed.  
, In some areas, letters or symbols that the  
recorder cannot record or display are  
replaced with “*.”  
The ‘BRAVIA’ Sync features do not  
operate.  
, Your TV is not compatible with the  
‘BRAVIA’ Sync features.  
, “Control for HDMI” is set to “Off” in the  
“HDMI Output” setup (page 140).  
, The recorder is connected to the TV via an  
amplifier. Connect the recorder directly to  
the TV.  
,continued  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The recorder does not operate properly.  
, Press down [/1 on the recorder for more  
than five seconds until the recorder turns  
off. Then, press [/1 again to turn on the  
recorder.  
, When static electricity, etc., causes the  
recorder to operate abnormally, turn off the  
recorder and wait until the clock appears in  
the front panel display. Then, unplug the  
recorder and after leaving it off for a while,  
plug it in again.  
“E02” appears in the front panel display.  
, The HDD information is incorrect. You  
cannot make a new recording to the HDD.  
Format the HDD following the instructions  
of “Format HDD.” (page 124). Note that  
all of the recorded contents on the HDD  
will be erased. If this does not fix the  
problem, contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
“UPDATE” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, The recorder is updating the EPG and other  
information.  
The disc tray does not open after you  
press Z (open/close).  
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray  
to open after you have recorded or edited a  
DVD. This is because the recorder is  
adding disc data to the disc.  
The Parental Lock does not work.  
, Check the “D.TV Age Limit” setting in the  
“Parental Lock” setup (page 139).  
Mechanical sounds are heard when the  
recorder is off.  
Any buttons do not function and  
“LOCKED” appears in the front panel  
display.  
, The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child  
Lock (page 14).  
, While the recorder is updating the EPG  
information, operational noises (such as  
the internal fan) may be heard, even when  
the power is off. This is not a malfunction.  
, While the recorder is adjusting the clock  
for the Auto Clock Set function or  
The disc tray does not open and  
“TRAYLOCKED” appears in the front  
panel display.  
, Contact your Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
updating the EPG information, operational  
noises may be heard, even when the power  
is off. This is not a malfunction.  
“REPAIR” appears in the front panel  
display.  
Resetting the Recorder  
, The recorder’s repair function is activated  
to repair the hard disk drive or disc. Leave  
the recorder on until “REPAIR” disappears  
from the front panel display. Some data  
may be lost even if the repair function is  
activated.  
You can reset the recorder to all its factory  
settings.  
1 Make sure that the recorder is turned  
on and remove the disc.  
2 Hold down x (stop) on the recorder  
and press [/1 on the recorder.  
All settings are reset and the recorder  
turns off.  
“E01” appears in the front panel display.  
, There is a problem in the HDD. Contact  
your nearest Sony dealer. Note that  
contents on the HDD may be erased when  
servicing this unit.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Recordable and Playable Discs  
Type  
Disc Logo  
Icon used Formatting  
Compatibility with other  
DVD players (finalising)  
in this  
(new discs)  
manual  
Harddisk VR  
Select “Video  
Mode Off” in  
“HDD Recording  
Format”  
Dub HDD contents to a  
DVD (VR mode) to play  
on other DVD players  
drive  
mode  
(internal)  
HDD  
Video  
mode  
Select “Video  
Mode On”  
Dub HDD contents to a  
DVD (Video mode) to  
(default) in “HDD play on other DVD  
RecordingFormat” players  
DVD+RW  
Automatically  
Playable on DVD+RW  
formatted in +VR compatible players  
mode (DVD+RW (automatically finalised)  
VIDEO)  
+
RW  
DVD-RW VR  
mode  
Format in VR  
Playable only on VR  
mode compatible players  
(finalisation unnecessary)  
-
RWVR  
Video  
mode  
Format in Video  
Playable on most DVD  
players (finalisation  
-
RWVideo  
DVD+R  
Automatically  
formatted in +VR players (finalisation  
Playable on most DVD  
mode (DVD+R  
VIDEO)  
+
R
DVD+R DL  
DVD-R  
VR  
mode  
Format in VR  
Formatting is  
performed in the  
“Format” setup  
Playable only on DVD-R  
in VR mode compatible  
players (finalisation  
*1  
-
RVR  
DVD-R  
DL  
Video  
mode  
Automatically  
formatted in Video players (finalisation  
mode necessary) (page 46)  
Playable on most DVD  
-
RVideo  
,continued  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
b Notes  
Usable disc versions (as of April 2008)  
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+RWs  
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on  
the same DVD-RW. To change the disc’s  
format, reformat the disc (page 49). Note that the  
disc’s contents will be erased after reformatting.  
• You cannot shorten the time required for  
recording even with high-speed discs.  
• It is recommended that you use discs with “For  
Video” printed on their packaging.  
• You cannot add new recordings to DVD+Rs,  
DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (Video mode) that  
contain recordings made on other DVD  
equipment.  
• 6x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1,  
*2  
Ver.1.2 with CPRM  
)
• 16x-speed or slower DVD+Rs  
• 16x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0,  
*2  
Ver.2.1 with CPRM  
)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double  
Layer) discs  
• 8x-speed or slower DVD-R DL (Dual  
*2  
Layer) discs (Ver.3.0 with CPRM  
)
• In some cases, you may not be able to add new  
recordings to DVD+RWs that contain  
recordings made on other DVD equipment. If  
you do add a new recording, note that this  
recorder will rewrite the DVD menu.  
“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R  
DL,” “DVD-R,” and “DVD-R DL” are  
trademarks.  
*1  
When an unformatted DVD-R is inserted into  
• You cannot edit recordings on DVD+RWs,  
DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-  
Rs that are made on other DVD equipment.  
• If the disc contains PC data unrecognisable by  
this recorder, the data may be erased.  
• You may not be able to record, edit, or dub on  
some recordable discs, depending on the disc.  
• Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or  
played on this recorder. This may cause the  
recorder to malfunction.  
this recorder, it is automatically formatted in  
Video mode. To format a new DVD-R in VR  
mode, format in the “Format” setup (page 49).  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable  
Media) is a coding technology that protects  
copyrights for images.  
*2  
Discs that cannot be recorded on  
• DVD-RAMs  
Maximum recordable number of titles  
Disc  
Number of titles  
HDD*  
999  
99  
DVD-RW/DVD-R  
DVD+RW/DVD+R  
DVD+R DL  
DVD-R DL  
49  
49  
99  
* The maximum length for one title is 12 hours.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playable Discs  
Icon used in  
this manual  
Type  
Disc Logo  
Characteristics  
Discs such as movies that can be  
purchased or rented  
DVD VIDEO  
This recorder also recognises DVD-  
RAMs* as DVD Video compatible  
discs.  
DVD  
VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in  
VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD format  
VIDEO CD  
CD  
VCD  
CD  
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in  
music CD format  
DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RAMs*  
containing MP3 audio tracks or DivX  
video files  
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-ROMs  
containing MP3 audio tracks, JPEG  
image files or DivX video files  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
DATA DVD  
DATA CD  
CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs  
containing either MP3 audio tracks,  
JPEG image files or DivX video files  
“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” are trademarks.  
• DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/  
DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs that do not contain  
DVD Video, DivX video, JPEG image  
files, or MP3 audio tracks.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are  
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under  
license.  
• DVD Audio discs  
®
DivX is a video file compression technology,  
• Cartridge-only type DVD-RAMs.  
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs  
• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code  
developed by DivX, Inc.  
* If the DVD-RAM has a removable cartridge,  
remove the cartridge before playback.  
• DVDs that were recorded on a different  
recorder and not correctly finalised.  
Discs that cannot be played  
• PHOTO CDs  
• CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are  
recorded in a format different from the  
formats mentioned in the table above.  
• Data part of CD-Extras  
• BDs (Blu-ray Discs)  
• HD DVDs  
Note on playback operations of DVD  
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs  
Some playback operations of DVD  
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs may be intentionally  
set by software producers. Since this  
recorder plays DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs  
according to the disc contents the software  
producers designed, some playback features  
may not be available. Refer to the  
instructions supplied with the DVD  
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs.  
• Discs recorded with an AVCHD-  
compatible DVD video camera  
,continued  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
b Notes  
Region code (DVD VIDEO only)  
• Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-  
Rs, DVD-RAMs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be  
played on this recorder due to the recording  
quality or physical condition of the disc, or the  
characteristics of the recording device and  
authoring software. The disc will not play if it  
has not been correctly finalised. For more  
information, refer to the operating instructions  
for the recording device.  
• If the disc contains PC data unrecognisable by  
this recorder, the data may be erased.  
• Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or  
played on this recorder. This may cause the  
recorder to malfunction.  
Your recorder has a region code printed on  
the rear of the unit and will only play DVD  
VIDEOs (playback only) labelled with  
identical region codes. This system is used to  
protect copyrights.  
DVD VIDEOs labelled  
on this recorder.  
will also play  
ALL  
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO,  
the message “Playback prohibited by region  
code.” will appear on the TV screen.  
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region  
code indication may be labelled even though  
playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by  
area restrictions.  
Region code  
About Recording/  
Dubbing Mode  
Music discs encoded with copyright  
protection technologies  
This product is designed to play back discs  
that conform to the Compact Disc (CD)  
standard.  
Various music discs encoded with copyright  
protection technologies are being marketed  
by some record companies. Please be aware  
that among those discs, there are some that  
do not conform to the CD standard and may  
not be playable by this product.  
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of  
video tapes, you can select the desired  
recording mode using the REC MODE  
button.  
Recording modes with higher quality  
provide a more beautiful recording, but the  
large data volume also results in a shorter  
recording time.  
Conversely, a longer duration provides a  
longer recording time, but the lower data  
volume results in a coarser picture quality.  
Note on DualDiscs  
To select further options for recording mode  
(manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec.  
Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the  
A DualDisc is a two sided disc product  
which mates DVD recorded material on one  
side with digital audio material on the other  
side.  
However, since the audio material side does  
not conform to the Compact Disc (CD)  
standard, playback on this product is not  
guaranteed.  
“Recording” setup (page 135). To record  
pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on  
the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On  
(go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” The  
table on the following pages shows the  
approximate recording times for the HDD  
and the different DVD types in each manual  
recording mode, as well as the standard  
recording mode equivalents.  
z Hint  
To easily select a manual recording mode, press  
REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and  
select a manual recording mode using </,.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recording time in each recording mode  
Bold lines indicate noticeable level differences in recording picture quality.  
Approx. recording time (hours)  
HDD  
DVD+RW/  
DVD-RW/  
DVD+R/  
DVD-R  
Recording  
mode  
DVD+R DL/  
DVD-R DL  
RDR-  
RDR-  
RDR-  
RDR-  
HXD790/ HXD890/ HXD990/ HXD1090/  
HXD795 HXD895 HXD995 HXD1095  
*1  
*2  
HQ+  
17  
25  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
36  
37  
39  
42  
44  
46  
51  
54  
59  
63  
67  
72  
75  
78  
82  
86  
90  
93  
100  
110  
120  
150  
175  
23  
36  
73  
PCM  
HQ MN32  
MN31  
34  
53  
105  
105  
115  
120  
130  
140  
150  
155  
165  
175  
185  
195  
210  
230  
245  
265  
280  
300  
315  
335  
350  
370  
390  
405  
420  
475  
530  
635  
745  
1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min.  
1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min.  
1 hr. 5 min. 1 hr. 57 min.  
1 hr. 10 min. 2 hr. 6 min.  
1 hr. 15 min. 2 hr. 15 min.  
1 hr. 20 min. 2 hr. 24 min.  
1 hr. 25 min. 2 hr. 33 min.  
1 hr. 30 min. 2 hr. 41 min.  
1 hr. 35 min. 2 hr. 50 min.  
1 hr. 40 min. 2 hr. 59 min.  
1 hr. 45 min. 3 hr. 8 min.  
1 hr. 50 min. 3 hr. 17 min.  
34  
53  
36  
57  
MN30  
39  
61  
MN29  
42  
66  
MN28  
45  
70  
MN27  
48  
75  
HSP MN26  
MN25  
50  
79  
53  
84  
MN24  
56  
88  
MN23  
59  
92  
MN22  
62  
97  
SP  
MN21  
MN20  
MN19  
68  
105  
115  
120  
130  
140  
150  
155  
165  
175  
185  
190  
200  
210  
235  
265  
315  
370  
2
3 hr. 35 min.  
73  
2 hr. 10 min. 3 hr. 53 min.  
2 hr. 20 min. 4 hr. 11 min.  
2 hr. 30 min. 4 hr. 29 min.  
2 hr. 40 min. 4 hr. 47 min.  
2 hr. 50 min. 5 hr. 5 min.  
79  
LSP MN18  
MN17  
84  
90  
MN16  
96  
ESP MN15  
MN14  
100  
105  
110  
115  
120  
125  
135  
150  
165  
200  
235  
3
5 hr. 23 min.  
3 hr. 10 min. 5 hr. 41 min.  
3 hr. 20 min. 5 hr. 59 min.  
3 hr. 30 min. 6 hr. 17 min.  
3 hr. 40 min. 6 hr. 35 min.  
3 hr. 50 min. 6 hr. 53 min.  
MN13  
MN12  
MN11  
MN10  
LP  
EP  
MN9  
MN8  
MN7  
MN6  
MN5  
4
7 hr. 11 min.  
4 hr. 30 min. 8 hr. 4 min.  
5
6
7
8 hr. 58 min.  
10 hr. 46 min.  
12 hr. 34 min.  
*3  
*3  
,continued  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Approx. recording time (hours)  
HDD  
DVD+RW/  
DVD-RW/  
DVD+R/  
DVD-R  
Recording  
mode  
DVD+R DL/  
DVD-R DL  
RDR-  
RDR-  
RDR-  
RDR-  
HXD790/ HXD890/ HXD990/ HXD1090/  
HXD795 HXD895 HXD995 HXD1095  
*3  
SLP MN4  
SEP MN3  
MN2  
200  
255  
300  
340  
270  
340  
405  
455  
425  
530  
635  
710  
850  
8
14 hr. 21 min.  
17 hr. 57 min.  
21 hr. 32 min.  
*3*4  
*3*4  
*3*4  
1060  
1275  
1420  
10  
12  
MN1  
13 hr. 22 min. 24  
*1  
Records in higher quality (15 Mbps).  
When recording to the HDD in HQ+ mode, recordings are made in “Video Mode Off” format regardless  
of the “HDD Recording Format” setting (page 137).  
HQ+ mode is not available for DVDs. When recording to DVDs, the recording mode automatically  
switches to HQ mode even if you set to HQ+ mode.  
*2  
Audio signals are recorded in 48 kHz PCM format, and video signals are recorded in HQ mode. When  
recording a bilingual programme, select the sound to be recorded (page 132).  
Titles recorded in MN6 or lower mode cannot be dubbed to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs at high speed.  
SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode is not available for DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+R DLs. When  
recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the recording mode automatically switches to SLP mode even if  
you set to SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode.  
*3  
*4  
b Notes  
Resolution  
• The maximum continuous recording time to the  
HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer  
than 12 hours is divided.  
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies  
with the recording time.  
The first figure refers to when “Input Line  
System” is set to “NTSC”; the second when  
set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup  
– Recording a programme with poor reception,  
or a programme or video source of low picture  
quality.  
– Recording on a disc that has already been  
edited.  
For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is  
set to “Video Mode Off”)/DVD-RW (VR  
mode)/DVD-R (VR mode)  
HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN16: 720 × 480 /  
720 × 576  
MN15 to MN12: 544 × 480 / 544 × 576  
MN11 to MN9: 480 × 480 / 544 × 576  
MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576  
MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288  
– Recording only a still picture or just sound.  
For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is  
set to “Video Mode On”)/DVD+RW/DVD-RW  
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)  
PCM, MN32 to MN9: 720 × 480 / 720 × 576  
MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576  
MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288  
z Hint  
Audio signals are recorded in Dolby Digital 2 ch  
format (except for PCM mode).  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About “High-Speed” dubbing  
About Copy Protection  
Required times (approximate) for “High-  
Speed” dubbing from HDD to DVD (for 60-  
minute programme)  
Pictures with copy protection cannot be  
recorded on this recorder.  
*1  
Dubbing restriction  
*2  
Speed 6x  
2.4x  
2x  
You cannot dub movies and other DVD  
VIDEOs to the HDD. Also, when dubbing  
from a DVD to the HDD, scenes that contain  
a copy protection signal cannot be recorded.  
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy  
protection signals can be moved only from  
the HDD to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR  
mode)* (after the title is moved, the original  
title in the HDD is erased). The “Move”  
function is performed using Dubbing List.  
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy  
Rec.  
mode  
High-  
speed  
DVD+RW/ Layer)  
DVD-RW/  
DVD+R/  
DVD+R DVD-R  
(Double (Dual  
Layer)  
DVD-R  
HQ  
Approx.  
10 min.  
Approx. Approx.  
25 min. 30 min.  
HSP  
Approx.  
6 min.  
40 sec.  
Approx. Approx.  
16 min.  
40 sec.  
20 min.  
protection signals are indicated with  
.
SP  
Approx.  
5 min.  
Approx. Approx.  
Discs that can be used for protected  
signals  
12 min.  
30 sec.  
15 min.  
LSP  
ESP  
Approx.  
4 min.  
Approx. Approx.  
10 min. 12 min.  
Copy  
protection  
signals  
Usable discs  
Approx.  
3 min.  
20 sec.  
Approx. Approx.  
8 min.  
20 sec.  
10 min.  
Copy-Free (No  
copy protection  
signal)  
+
-
RWVR  
RW  
HDD  
-
+
-
RVR  
RWVideo  
R
LP  
Approx.  
2 min.  
30 sec.  
Approx. Approx.  
-
6 min.  
15 sec.  
7 min.  
30 sec.  
RVideo  
Copy-Once  
HDD  
EP  
Approx.  
1 min.  
Approx. Approx.  
*
*
*3  
-
RWVR  
60 min.  
5 min.  
*3  
40 sec.  
-
RVR  
SLP  
SEP  
Approx.  
1 min.  
15 sec.  
Approx. Approx.  
Copy-Never  
None  
*3  
60 min.  
3 min.  
45 sec.  
*3  
* CPRM-compatible DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR  
mode) only.  
The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM  
compatible equipment (page 152).  
Approx.  
Approx. Approx.  
*3  
*3  
*3  
1 min.  
60 min.  
3 min.  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable  
Media) is a coding technology that protects  
copyrights for images.  
*1  
The values in the above table are for reference  
only. Actual times for dubbing also require time  
for creating disc’s control information and other  
data.  
This is the maximum recording speed of this  
recorder. The recording speed cannot exceed  
the value indicated in the above table even  
when using discs that support higher recording  
speeds. In addition, depending on the disc  
condition, the recorder may be unable to record  
at the maximum recording speed indicated in  
the table.  
b Notes  
*2  
• Protected titles in the HDD cannot be moved.  
• The “Move” function is not available for HDD/  
DVD DUB dubbing.  
• Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy  
protection signal, the recording restrictions on  
that title are retained.  
*3  
“High-Speed” dubbing is not available when  
dubbing titles recorded in SEP, SLP, or EP  
mode to DVD+RWs and DVD+Rs.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Language Code List  
For details, see page 134.  
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.  
Number, Language (Code)  
Country/Area Code  
For details, see page 138.  
Number, Area (Code)  
0118, Argentina (ar)  
0121, Australia (au)  
0120, Austria (at)  
0205, Belgium (be)  
0218, Brazil (br)  
0609, Finland (fi)  
0618, France (fr)  
0405, Germany (de)  
0811, Hong Kong (hk)  
0914, India (in)  
1325, Malaysia (my)  
1324, Mexico (mx)  
1412, Netherlands (nl)  
1426, New Zealand (nz)  
1415, Norway (no)  
1611, Pakistan (pk)  
1608, Philippines (ph)  
1620, Portugal (pt)  
1821, Russia (ru)  
1907, Singapore (sg)  
0519, Spain (es)  
1905, Sweden (se)  
0308, Switzerland (ch)  
2023, Taiwan (tw)  
2008, Thailand (th)  
0702, United Kingdom  
(gb)  
0301, Canada (ca)  
0312, Chile (cl)  
0904, Indonesia (id)  
0920, Italy (it)  
0314, China (cn)  
0411, Denmark (dk)  
1016, Japan (jp)  
1118, Korea (kr)  
2119, USA (us)  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Notes about the discs  
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by  
its edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,  
fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may  
cause it to malfunction.  
Notes About This  
Recorder  
On operation  
• If the recorder is brought directly from a  
cold to a warm location, or is placed in a  
very damp room, moisture may condense  
on the lenses inside the recorder. Should  
this occur, the recorder may not operate  
properly. In this case, if the recorder is on,  
leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about  
an hour until the moisture evaporates.  
• When you move the recorder, take out any  
discs and do not apply shock or vibration to  
the hard disk drive to avoid damaging the  
disc or hard disk drive (page 4).  
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or  
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave  
it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the  
temperature may rise considerably inside  
the car.  
• After playing, store the disc in its case.  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe  
the disc from the centre out.  
On adjusting volume  
Do not turn up the volume while listening to  
a section with very low level inputs or no  
audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be  
damaged when a peak level section is  
played.  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,  
thinner, commercially available cleaners,  
or anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.  
• Do not use the following discs.  
– A disc that has a non-standard shape  
(e.g., card, heart).  
– A disc with a label or sticker on it.  
– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker  
adhesive on it.  
On cleaning  
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a  
soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild  
detergent solution. Do not use any type of  
abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent  
such as alcohol or benzine.  
On replacement of parts  
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners  
Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens  
cleaners (including wet or spray types).  
These may cause the recorder to  
malfunction.  
In the event that this unit is repaired,  
repaired parts may be collected for reuse or  
recycling purposes.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note on MultiSession/Border discs  
If audio tracks and images in Music CD  
format or Video CD format are recorded in  
the first session/border, only the first  
session/border will be played back.  
Notes on MP3 Audio  
Tracks, JPEG Image  
Files, DivX Video Files,  
and i.Link  
MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image  
files, or DivX video files that  
the recorder can play  
About MP3 audio tracks, JPEG  
image files, and DivX video  
files  
The recorder can play the following tracks  
and files:  
– MP3 audio tracks with the extension  
“.mp3.”  
– JPEG image files with the extension  
“.jpeg” or “.jpg.”  
– Baseline JPEG image files that conform to  
the Exif 2.2* image files format, and  
Y:CB:CR is 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:0.  
– DivX video files with the extension “.avi”  
or “.divx.”  
MP3 is an audio compression technology  
that satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations.  
JPEG is an image compression technology.  
You can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)  
format audio tracks on the HDD, DATA  
CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) or  
DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-  
RAMs) or play JPEG image files on the  
HDD, DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-  
RWs) or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs).  
* “Exchangeable Image File Format”: The file  
format used by digital still cameras.  
z Hint  
®
Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start  
playback, it is recommended that you create  
albums with no more than two trees.  
DivX is a video file compression  
technology, developed by DivX, Inc. This  
®
product is an official DivX Certified  
product. You can play DATA CDs (CD-  
ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) and DATA DVDs  
(DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-  
RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs) that contain  
DivX video files.  
DATA DVDs must be recorded according to  
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or  
UDF (Universal Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50,  
2.00*, or 2.01 format for the recorder to  
recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG image files,  
and DivX video files.  
DATA CDs must be recorded according to  
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet  
format for the recorder to recognise the MP3  
tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video  
files.  
b Notes  
• The recorder will play any data with the  
extension “.mp3,” “.jpeg,” “.jpg,” “.avi,” or  
“.divx” even if they are not in MP3, JPEG, or  
DivX format. Playing these data may generate a  
loud noise which could damage your speaker  
system.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may not  
be possible. For example, the picture may be  
unclear, playback may not appear smooth, the  
sound may skip, and so on.  
• Depending on the disc, playback may take some  
time to start.  
• Some files cannot be played.  
• For MP3 audio tracks and DivX video files, the  
recorder can play up to 99 albums each on a  
DATA CD or DATA DVD. Up to 99 tracks and  
files under an album can be played.  
• For JPEG image files, the recorder can load up to  
99 albums and/or up to 999 files under an album  
on a DATA CD/DATA DVD or the connected  
USB device at a time. To view unloaded albums,  
reload them.  
You can also play discs recorded in  
MultiSession/Border.  
Refer to the instructions supplied with the  
disc drives and the recording software (not  
supplied) for details on the recording format.  
* Not available for MP3 audio tracks.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Proceeding to the next or another album may  
take some time.  
• The image size that can be displayed is limited.  
The following image sizes can be displayed:  
width 160–5,120 pixels by height 120–3,840  
pixels.  
• This recorder supports MP3 audio tracks  
recorded with a sampling frequency of 32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.  
• No more than a 1 GB MP3 audio track can be  
played.  
About i.LINK  
The DV IN jack on this recorder is i.LINK-  
compliant for digital video cameras.  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE  
1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY,  
and is a trademark approved by many  
corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard  
standardized by the Institute of Electrical  
and Electronics Engineers.  
• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in  
mp3PRO format.  
• The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of a  
size larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height)/4 GB.  
• The recorder may not play a DivX video file  
when the file has been combined from two or  
more DivX video files.  
For details on how to dub when this recorder  
is connected to other video equipment  
having DV jacks, see page 98.  
The DV IN jack on this recorder can only  
input DVC-SD signals. It cannot output  
signals. The DV IN jack will not accept  
MICRO MV signals from equipment such as  
a MICRO MV digital video camera with an  
i.LINK jack.  
Notes on copying JPEG image files/MP3  
audio tracks  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files/MP3 audio  
tracks to the HDD if:  
– The total number of JPEG image albums on  
the HDD exceeds 999.  
For further precautions, see the notes on  
page 98.  
– The total number of JPEG image files/MP3  
audio tracks under an album exceeds 999.  
– The MP3 audio tracks are 1 GB or larger.  
• Note that the size of JPEG image files copied to  
the HDD may be automatically increased to fit  
the TV screen.  
• You cannot copy JPEG image files onto a DATA  
DVD finalised on other recorders or devices.  
• If a warning message indicating that the HDD is  
full appears, erase several albums or files to  
make space. For details on erasing tracks or files,  
For details on precautions when connecting  
this recorder, also refer to the instruction  
manuals for the equipment to be connected.  
b Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be  
connected to this recorder by the i.LINK cable  
(DV connecting cable). When connecting this  
recorder to i.LINK-compatible equipment having  
two or more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the  
instruction manual of the equipment to be  
connected.  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Inputs and outputs  
LINE 2 OUT  
Specifications  
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms  
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p  
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)  
LINE 2 IN  
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than  
22 kilohms  
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p  
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)  
System  
Laser: Semiconductor laser  
Transmission standards (Digital  
broadcasting): DVB-T  
Channel coverage (Digital  
broadcasting):  
VHF: 170 MHz to 230 MHz  
UHF: 470 MHz to 862 MHz  
Channel coverage (Analogue  
broadcasting):  
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin  
CVBS OUT  
PAL (B/G, D/K, I)/SECAM (L)  
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to  
F10, Italian A to H, Ireland A to J,  
South Africa 4 to 11, 13  
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to  
B69, F21 to F69  
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France  
B to Q  
HYPER: S21 to S41  
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)  
LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin  
CVBS IN/OUT  
S-Video/RGB IN  
Decoder  
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100  
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono  
jack/0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR):  
The above channel coverage merely ensures  
the channel reception within these ranges. It  
does not guarantee the ability to receive  
signals in all circumstances. The channels  
that can be received differ depending on the  
country/region.  
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,  
PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p  
G-LINK: mini jack  
HDMI OUT: HDMI™ Connector  
USB:  
USB jack Type A (For connecting  
digital still camera, Memory card  
reader, USB memory and HDD  
camcorder)  
Video reception: Frequency  
synthesizer system  
Audio reception: Split carrier system  
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial  
socket  
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer  
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)  
Video recording format: MPEG-2,  
MPEG-1  
Audio recording format/applicable  
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch  
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and  
SEP mode), PCM  
USB jack Type B (For connecting  
PictBridge-compatible printers)  
Conditional access module (RDR-  
HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/  
HXD1095 only): CAM (Conditional  
Access Module) slot  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General  
Power requirements: 220-240 V AC,  
50/60 Hz  
Power consumption:  
RDR-HXD790/HXD890/HXD990/  
HXD1090: 47 W  
RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/  
HXD1095: 49 W  
Dimensions (approx.):  
430 × 76.5 × 288 mm (width/height/  
depth) incl. projecting parts  
Hard disk drive capacity:  
RDR-HXD790/HXD795: 120 GB  
RDR-HXD890/HXD895: 160 GB  
RDR-HXD990/HXD995: 250 GB  
RDR-HXD1090/HXD1095: 500 GB  
Mass (approx.): 4.7 kg  
Operating temperature: 5ºC to 35ºC  
Operating humidity: 25% to 80%  
Supplied accessories:  
Mains lead (1)  
Aerial cable (1)*  
Remote commander (remote) (1)  
Set top box controller (1)  
R6 (size AA) batteries (2)  
* Two aerial cables are supplied for some models.  
Specifications and design are subject to  
change without notice.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Clock Set 31, 124  
“Auto Language” 134  
“Auto Scan” 127  
Connecting  
a printer 118  
Index  
the aerial cable 18  
the audio cords 25  
the HDMI cord 22,  
“Auto Skip” 126  
Words in quotations appear  
in the on-screen displays.  
B
the set top box  
“Basic” 123, 124  
Numerics  
“96 kHz PCM Output”  
controller 18  
Batteries 27  
the USB device 102,  
“Bilingual Recording”  
the video cords 22  
Controlling TVs with the  
remote 28  
Bilingual recording 70  
‘BRAVIA’ Sync 24  
A
“A.TV Auto Channel  
Setting” 30  
“Copy” 110  
C
CAM 26  
Canal Plus 36  
“Cancel Protection” 117  
“CH System” 128  
“Change Genre” 83  
“Change Password” 138  
“Channel” 128  
“A-B Erase” 84  
“A-B Repeat” 77  
“Add New Channels” 126  
“Add to Play List” 105  
Adjusting  
playback picture 120  
recording picture 120  
Aerial 18  
“Copy Album” 103  
“Copy Album Contents”  
“Copy all to HDD” 108  
“Copy Photos from a  
Digital Camera” 109  
Copy protection signals  
“Copy to DVD” 110, 111  
“Copy to HDD” 108  
“Copy Track” 103  
Copy-Free 157  
“Aerial Power” 30, 127  
“Channel Options” 126  
“Channel Sort” 126  
“Channel Swapping” 130  
Chapter 43, 58, 70  
“Chapter Edit” 85  
Chapter number 43  
“Chapter Search” 80  
“Chase Play” 79  
Checking/changing/  
cancelling timer settings  
“AFT” 129  
“Album Name” 107  
“Alternate Search” 56  
“Analog Tuner” 127  
“Analog Tuner Level”  
ANGLE 75, 114  
“Angle Indicator” 75, 138  
“Artist Name” 107  
AUDIO 75  
Copying  
albums 102  
audio tracks 102  
JPEG image files 108  
Copy-Never 157  
Copy-Once 157  
Country/Area code 158  
CPRM 152  
Audio cord 25  
Child Lock 14  
“Audio DRC” 134  
“Audio In” 132  
Audio input 26  
“Audio Language” 134  
“Audio Out” 133  
“Auto” 124  
“Create x-Pict Story” 115  
Creating a Playlist 87  
“CI Information” 142  
“Clock Setting” 31, 124  
“Combine” 86, 87  
“Command Mode” 29,  
D
“D.TV Age Limit” 139  
“D.TV Auto Channel  
Setting” 30  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT 23  
“Auto Channel Setting”  
“D.TV Language” 127  
DATA CD 153  
DATA DVD 153  
“Decoder” 37, 130  
DIGITAL OUT  
(COAXIAL) 25  
“Component Video Out”  
Conditional Access  
Module 26  
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/  
+RW)” 136  
“Auto Chapter (HDD/  
VR)” 136  
“Auto Chapter (Video)”  
“Confirm Printer” 142  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Digital Services  
Digital Text viewing  
DVD VIDEO 153  
DVD+R 151  
DVD+RW 151  
DVD-R 151  
DVD-RAM 153  
DVD-RW 151  
G
“Genre Name” 83  
“Grid” 62  
EPG 50  
Programme  
GUIDE 61, 66  
GUIDE Plus+ system 61,  
information 51  
“Digital Tuner” 126  
Disc settings 45, 46, 49,  
E
H
Easy Setup 30, 125  
“Edit” 83, 107  
Editing 82  
Handling discs 159  
HDD camcorder 94  
HDD camcorder dubbing  
“Disc Setup” 45, 46, 49,  
Disc space 82  
chapters 85  
Playlist 87  
titles 83  
Disc types 151, 153  
“Divide” 84, 86, 87  
DivX  
“Full Dubbing” 96  
“HDD-Cam  
Dubbing” 96  
One-Touch Dubbing  
“Editor” 62  
Enter characters 44  
EPG  
Viewing a list of  
available  
channels 50  
“EPG Type Select” 31,  
“Registration Code”  
DivX video files 73  
Dolby Digital 25, 133  
“Download from TV” 127  
DTS 25, 133  
“HDD RecordingFormat”  
“HDD-Cam Dubbing” 96  
HDMI  
Dubbing  
“4:3 Video Output”  
“Audio Output” 140  
“Colour” 140  
“Control for HDMI”  
Dubbing List 90  
HDD/DVD DUB 90  
“High-Speed” 157  
Move 157  
“Erase” 59, 83, 86, 107,  
“Erase Album” 117  
“External Audio” 132  
DV camcorder 98  
DV camcorder dubbing 98  
“DV Manual  
F
“Screen Resolution”  
“Finalise” 46  
Dubbing” 100  
“DV One-Touch  
Dubbing” 100  
Finalising 46  
“Format” 49  
HDMI cord 22, 25  
HDMI OUT 23, 25  
“HDMI Output” 139  
“HELP Setting” 125  
“Format DVD-RW” 123  
“Format HDD.” 124  
Formatting 49  
“Frame Accurate Editing”  
Freeze Frame 76  
Front panel 14  
“Front Panel Display” 141  
Front panel display 15  
“Full Dubbing” 96  
“DV Playback” 101  
DV IN 98  
“DV Input” 99, 132  
“DV Manual Dubbing”  
“DV One-Touch  
Dubbing” 100  
“DV Playback” 101  
“DVD Backup” 93  
“DVD Menu Language”  
I
i.LINK 161  
“Info” 62  
INPUT 60  
“Input Colour System”  
“Input Line System” 125  
J
“DVD Playback” 138  
Jukebox 102  
,continued  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Optimise HDD” 124  
“Options” 141  
“Options 2” 142  
Playlist 41, 82, 104  
“Power Save” 125  
Printing JPEG image files  
“Programme” 78, 106  
Programme information  
“Progressive” 31  
“Protect” 83, 117  
“Protect Album Contents”  
“Protect Disc” 45  
Protection  
L
Labelling 45  
“Language” 134  
“LINE 1 In” 131  
LINE 1/DECODER 34  
LINE 2 IN 35  
“LINE 3 Out” 131  
“Original” 41, 82, 104  
“OSD Language” 134  
P
Page mode 41, 104, 113  
“Parental Lock” 74, 138  
Parts and controls 12  
Pause Live TV 79  
“Pause Mode” 138  
PAY-TV 36  
M
Main sound 70, 132  
Mains lead 27  
Making a backup disc 93  
Managing  
album 117  
disc 45  
JPEG image file 117  
title 83  
PBC 73  
PDC 57, 69  
audio tracks on the  
Music Jukebox  
“Photo Album” 108, 112  
“Picture Adjustment” 120  
Picture quality 120  
“Play List Name” 107  
PLAY MODE 77, 78  
Play mode  
JPEG image files 117  
“Manual” 124  
Q
“Manual CH Setting” 128  
Manual Clock Set 31, 124  
“Manual Rec. Mode” 135  
Manual recording mode  
Quick Timer 58, 69  
“A-B Repeat” 77  
“Programme” 78,  
R
Rear panel 16  
REC 38  
MENU 73  
Menu  
“Repeat” 77  
REC MODE 154  
REC STOP 38, 96, 100  
“Rec. Mode Adjust” 54,  
Playable discs 151, 153  
“Playback” 137  
Playback 73, 104, 112,  
DVD’s Menu 73  
Top menu 73  
“Modify” 59  
“Recommendation  
Search” 56  
“Move” 87, 88  
MP3 audio tracks 73  
MPEG 25, 133  
“Multi-Mode” 83, 117  
“Music Jukebox” 102  
“My TV” 62  
“A-B Repeat” 77  
DivX video files 73  
DV camcorder 101  
fast forward 76, 105  
fast reverse 76, 105  
freeze frame 76  
instant advance 75  
instant replay 75  
JPEG image files 112  
Jukebox 104  
MP3 audio tracks 73  
“Programme” 78,  
“Repeat” 77, 105  
resume play 74  
rotate 114  
Recordable discs 151  
“Recording” 135  
Recording 53, 66  
picture adjustment  
recording format 151  
recording mode 40,  
N
“Name” 130  
“New Album” 117  
NICAM 70  
“NICAM Select” 132  
“NTSC on PAL TV” 131  
Number buttons 80  
recording time 40,  
Series Recording 55  
while watching  
another  
programme 39  
Recording mode 40, 154  
Recording time 40, 154  
Recovery Recording 57,  
O
“On Screen Display” 141  
ONE-TOUCH DUB 96,  
scan audio 76  
slow-motion play 76  
zoom 114  
One-Touch Play 24, 74  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Region code 154  
Remaining time 43  
Remote 12, 27  
Setting up the GUIDE  
Plus+ system 32  
“Setup” 62  
“Signal Check” 127  
Simultaneous Rec and  
Play 80  
“Skip” 128  
“Skip Once” 59  
Slideshow 114  
TOP MENU 73  
“Track Name” 107  
“Track Search” 80  
Troubleshooting 143  
TV Direct Rec. 24, 39  
TV PAUSE 79  
“Rename Album” 117  
“Rename File” 117  
“Repeat” 77, 105  
“Repeat Album” 77, 105  
“Repeat Artist” 105  
“Repeat Chapter” 77  
“Repeat Disc” 77  
“Repeat Play List” 105  
“Repeat Programme” 77,  
“TV Pause” 79, 142  
TV system 130  
TV t 28, 39  
x-Pict Story 115  
“TV Type” 31, 137  
TV/DVD 29, 39  
Slow-motion play 76  
SMARTLINK 24, 141  
“Software Update” 142  
“Sort Titles” 41  
“Sound System” 130  
Split Programmes 55  
Sub sound 70, 132  
SUBTITLE 75  
“Subtitle Display” 135  
“Subtitle Language” 134  
“Subtitle Recording” 135  
Super VIDEO CD 153  
U
“Repeat Title” 77  
“Repeat Track” 77, 105  
“Replace Channels” 126  
Resetting the recorder  
“Undo” 83  
“Unfinalise” 48  
Unfinalising 48  
“Unprotected” 83  
Usable discs 151, 153  
USB 95  
“Restart USB Device”  
Resume Play 74  
Using the setup menus  
Rotate 114  
V
S
T
VIDEO CD 153  
Video cord 22  
“Video In/Out” 130  
Video input 23  
Video mode 151  
“Video Mode Compatible  
Editing” 82  
S VIDEO 23  
Thumbnail picture 42  
preview mode 42,  
Scan Audio 76  
“Schedule” 62  
“Seamless Playback” 138  
“Search” 62  
“Time Search” 80  
TIMER 56  
Timer List 59  
Timer recording  
check/change/cancel  
Searching  
audio track 105  
by genre 42  
fast reverse/fast  
forward 76, 105  
JPEG image file 114  
locating the  
VPS 57, 69  
VR mode 151  
EPG timer setting 53  
GUIDEPlus+system  
X
x-Pict Story 115  
“Play List” 116  
“Theme” 116  
beginning ofthe  
title/chapter/  
manual setting 56,  
track 75, 105  
“Rec. Mode Adjust”  
Z
scan audio 76  
Zoom 114  
ZWEITON 70  
“Series Recording” 55  
“Series Search” 56  
“Set Genre” 83  
“Set Password” 138  
“Set Preview” 142  
“Set Thumbnail” 83, 136  
Set top box controller 18,  
“Timing” 71  
Title 43  
Title List 40  
“Genre” 42  
“Sort Titles” 41  
thumbnail 42  
“Title Name” 83  
Title number 43  
“Title Search” 80  
Set top box receiver 20  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sony Corporation Printed in Hungary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sennheiser Stereo Receiver EK 3253 User Manual
Sharp Indoor Furnishings AN PH10EX User Manual
Snapper Lawn Aerator 4053 User Manual
Snapper Pressure Washer 1660 0 User Manual
Sony Camera Lens VCL ES20A User Manual
Sony Car Stereo System XR C8220 User Manual
Sony Flat Panel Television 46NX810 User Manual
Sony Personal Computer PCG R505TEK User Manual
Sony Portable Radio ICF 1000L User Manual
Sunbeam Styling Iron WD5800 User Manual